Sie sind auf Seite 1von 245

PROTECT

THIS ELECTRONIC VERSION OF


INFANTRY TRAINING VOLUME IV,
RANGES, PAMPHLET NO. 21-C,
REGULATIONS FOR CADETS
TRAINING WITH CADET AND
INFANTRY WEAPON SYSTEMS AND
PYROTECHNICS 2008, ARMY CODE
NO. 71855-C IS FOR USE AS A REF-
ERENCE AND PLANNING DOCU-
MENT FOR SUITABLY QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL ONLY.

THE RULES AND REGULATIONS


CONCERNING THE CARRIAGE OF A
FULL VERSION OF PAM 21-C FOR
ALL FIRING ARE EXTANT. USERS
ARE NOT TO PRINT SECTIONS OF
THIS DOCUMENT TO USE WHILST
CON-DUCTING TRAINING.

PROTECT 1
PROTECT
Army Code No. 71855-C

Infantry Training
Volume IV
Ranges

Pamphlet No. 21-C


Regulations for Cadets Training
with Cadet and Infantry Weapon
Systems and Pyrotechnics

This pamphlet Infantry Training, Volume IV, Ranges, Pamphlet No. 21-C,
Regulations for Cadet Training with Cadet and Infantry Weapon Systems
and Protechnics 2008, (Army Code No. 71855-C) now incorporates
Amendment 1, all versions not containing amendment 1 which should now
be destroyed.

2008
PROTECT
PROTECT

COPYRIGHT
This work is Crown copyright and the intellectual property rights for this publication
belong exclusively to the Ministry of Defence (MOD). No material or information con-
tained in this publication should be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmit-
ted in any form outside MOD establishments except as authorized by both the sponsor
and the MOD where appropriate.

SECURITY
This document is issued for the information of such persons who need to know its con-
tents in the course of their official duties. Any person finding this document should hand
it into a British Forces unit or to a British police station for its safe return to the MINISTRY
OF DEFENCE, D MOD SY, LONDON SW1A 2HB, with particulars of how and where
found. THE UNAUTHORIZED RETENTION OR DESTRUCTION OF THIS DOCUMENT
COULD BE AN OFFENCE UNDER THE OFFICIAL SECRETS ACTS OF 1911–1989.

AUTHORITY
This publication is issued under the overall direction of the CGS. It is an MOD Approved
Code of Practice (ACOP). Where issues of health and safety are concerned it takes into
account the provisions of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.

STATUS
The contents provide clear military information concerning the most up to date experi-
ence and best practice available for commanders and troops to use in their operations
and training. If you are prosecuted for a breach of health and safety law, and it is proved
that you have not followed the relevant provisions of the ACOP, a court may find you
criminally liable unless you can show that you have complied with the requirements of
health and safety legislation since it is a breach of this legislation which renders a per-
son criminally liable. Breaches or omissions of the ACOP could result in disciplinary
action under the provisions of the Army Act.

AMENDMENTS
Amdt No Date Amdt No Date Amdt No Date
No. 1 Apr 2010

DISTRIBUTION
(See page v)
FOR THE ATTENTION OF ALL SCALE HOLDERS
Units requiring an increase or decrease to their scale should apply to DGS Publications,
Room 239, Building 370, Trenchard Lines, Upavon, Pewsey, Wiltshire SN9 6BE who will
arrange for a revised distribution. Any request to exceed the scale must be supported by a
written justification which is to be referred by DGS Publications to HQ Infantry for approval.

ii PROTECT
PROTECT Army Code No. 71855-C

Infantry Training
Volume VI
Ranges

Pamphlet No. 21-C


Regulations for Cadets Training
with Cadet and Infantry Weapon
Systems and Pyrotechnics

Prepared under the direction


of the Chief of the General Staff

Ministry of Defence
May 2008

Crown Copyright Reserved

PROTECT 2008
PROTECT

iv PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

FOREWORD

Any person wishing to propose amendments to this pamphlet is invited to write to


Headquarters Infantry, Land Warfare Centre, WARMINSTER, BA12 0DJ. Any such
proposals will be given consideration and, if there is a requirement for them, the
appropriate amendments will be prepared and published.

This pamphlet supersedes Infantry Training, Volume IV, Ranges Pamphlet No. 21,
Regulations for the Planning, Conduct and Supervision of Firing and Training with
Infantry Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics – 2007 (Army Code No. 71855) which
should now be destroyed.

This pamphlet is the abbreviated version of Pamphlet 21, Regulations for Training
with Armoured Vehicles, Infantry Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics – 2009 (Army
Code No. 71855), specifically for use by Cadet Organisations.

IT IS THE INDIVIDUAL’S RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT HE/SHE IS


USING THE LATEST VERSION OF THIS PAMPHLET. IF IN DOUBT CONTACT
INFANTRY PUBLICATIONS AT HEADQUARTERS INFANTRY.

DISTRIBUTION

AC 71855-C
(Hard Copy)

Army
Division 1 Copy
Bdes 2 Copies
HQ Land Forces
LAIT 5 Copies
Cadet Branch 2 Copies
HQ Infantry 1 Copy
HQ SASC 10 Copies
ACFA 2 Copies
DRFC 1 Copy
CTC Frimley 20 Copies
CTTs 25 Copies
ACF County
HQ 5 Copies
Area/Coy HQ 2 Copies
Detachment 2 Copies

PROTECT v
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

CCFs 2 Copies
RAF
HQ Air Cadets 25 Copies
Air Cadet Regional HQ 1 Copy
Wg HQ 3 Copies
Sqn/Detachment 2 Copies
SATTS 25 Copies

Navy
HQ Sea Cadets 2 Copies
Area HQ 2 Copies
Trg Ship Detachment 2 Copies

Notes:
1. The previous system of A to F scaling is being phased out for General Staff
Publications as new or revised publications are issued. Units will in future receive a
specific initial entitlement as decided by the sponsor.

2. This General Staff Publication is issued in two formats. One is the normal hard
copy Army Code 71855-C, the other is a CD Army Code 71855D. Units will receive
a mixture of formats.

3. Requests for additional copies must be fully justified and are to be made to DGS
Publications in the first instance. Requests will fall into one of three categories and
are to be specified:

a. Replacement Issue. To bring units back up to entitlement as a result of


loss or damage.

b. Supplementary Issue. This applies when a unit’s role or circumstance


changes necessitating an increase to the original entitlement.

c. New Issue. This is where a unit has not previously been scaled for a par-
ticular publication.

4. Units are reminded that all publications are accountable documents and their
issue and receipt should be the responsibility of a nominated officer or SNCO/Adult
Instructor.

vi PROTECT
PROTECT

CONTENTS
Page

Foreword and Distribution ......................................................................... v


Illustrations ................................................................................................ xiv
References and Associated Publications ................................................. xv
Introduction ............................................................................................... xvii

CHAPTER 1. — GENERAL

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Purpose ................................................................................................ 1-1
Referencing .......................................................................................... 1-1
The Infantry Safe System of Training .................................................. 1-2
Hearing Protection................................................................................ 1-4

SECTION 2. — RESPONSIBILITIES AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS


ALL FIRING
Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-5
Definitions (Qualified, Current and Competent) .................................. 1-5
Responsibilities of Exercise Director, Planning, Conducting and
Safety Staff ...................................................................................... 1-6
Exercising Cadets ................................................................................ 1-8
Dress ................................................................................................... 1-8
Medical Cover ..................................................................................... 1-9
Written Instructions .............................................................................. 1-9
Risk Assessments ............................................................................... 1-10
Limitations in the Use of Missiles and Ammunition for Training
(LUMAT) .......................................................................................... 1-10
Briefings .............................................................................................. 1-10

SECTION 3. — RANGE ORDERS AND RANGE LOGS


Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-11
Handover/Takeover ............................................................................. 1-12
Training on Other Nations’ Facilities ..................................................... 1-12

SECTION 4. — MEDICAL SUPPORT


General ................................................................................................ 1-17
Aim ...................................................................................................... 1-17
Medical Risk Assessment .................................................................... 1-17
Level of Medical Cover ........................................................................ 1-18
Employment of Medical Personnel ...................................................... 1-18

PROTECT vii
PROTECT

Page

SECTION 5. — STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION OF AMMUNITION


AND EXPLOSIVES
Regulations .......................................................................................... 1-19

SECTION 6. — AMMUNITION ACCIDENT, INCIDENT AND WEAPON/


AMMUNITION DEFECT REPORTING PROCEDURE
Introduction .......................................................................................... 1-20
Types of Occurrence ............................................................................ 1-21
Terminology ......................................................................................... 1-21
Ammunition Accidents ......................................................................... 1-22
Ammunition Incidents .......................................................................... 1-23
Immediate Action to be Taken Following Ammunition
Accidents /Incidents.............................................................................. 1-23
Ammunition/Weapon Defect Reporting ................................................ 1-26
Immediate Action to be Taken Following an Ammunition Defect .......... 1-26
Immediate Action to be Taken Following a Weapon Defect ................. 1-26
Ammunition Incident Reporting Agencies ............................................ 1-27
Temporary Suspension of Range Staff ................................................. 1-29
Negligent Discharges ........................................................................... 1-30
Investigation of Accidents .................................................................... 1-31
Incident Reports — Accidents/Incidents and Matters of Public
Interest ............................................................................................. 1-31

Annex A Examples of Medical Risk Assessment .............................. 1A-1


Annex B Ammunition Accident/Incident Report ................................. 1B-1
Annex C Blind or Misfire Report ........................................................ 1C-1
Annex D Negligent Discharge Report ................................................ 1D-1

CHAPTER 2. — QUALIFICATION AND AUTHORISATION


SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Purpose ............................................................................................... 2-1
Referencing ......................................................................................... 2-1
Ranks and Appointments .................................................................... 2-1

SECTION 2. — GENERAL
Definitions ............................................................................................ 2-2
Qualification ......................................................................................... 2-2
Small Arms School Corps Instructors ................................................. 2-4
Cadet Force Range Qualification ........................................................ 2-4

SECTION 3. — QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES


FOR REGULAR AND RESERVE FORCES (ARMY), SMALL ARMS
Introduction .......................................................................................... 2-5
Authorities ........................................................................................... 2-5
Qualification Categories ...................................................................... 2-6

viii PROTECT
PROTECT

Page

SECTION 4. — QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES


FOR THE CADET FORCES
Introduction .......................................................................................... 2-16
Authorities ........................................................................................... 2-16
Qualification Categories ...................................................................... 2-16
CHAPTER 3. — TRAINING WITH BLANK AMMUNITION AND
PYROTECHNICS
SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Purpose ............................................................................................... 3-1
Referencing ......................................................................................... 3-1
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 3-2
Exercise Assistants ............................................................................. 3-2
Exercise Cadets .................................................................................. 3-2
Exercise Written Instruction ................................................................ 3-2
Medical Support .................................................................................. 3-3
Hearing Protection .............................................................................. 3-3
Dry Training Areas .............................................................................. 3-3
Performance Failures .......................................................................... 3-3

SECTION 2. — BLANK AMMUNITION


Safety Precautions ............................................................................... 3-4
Safety Rules ........................................................................................ 3-5

SECTION 3. — PYROTECHNICS
Safety Precautions ............................................................................... 3-6
Simulator Battle Sound (SBS) L35A1 .................................................. 3-7
Smoke Grenades ................................................................................. 3-8
Tripflares .............................................................................................. 3-8
The 1.5 inch Rocket Flare, Rocket Hand Fired .................................... 3-9
The Pistol Signal 16 mm Miniflare ...................................................... 3-10

Annex A An Example of an Exercise Action and Safety Plan (EASP) 3A-1

CHAPTER 4. — LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING


SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Purpose ............................................................................................... 4-1
Referencing ......................................................................................... 4-2
Authorized Live Firing Practices ......................................................... 4-2
Structure and Layout ........................................................................... 4-2

PROTECT ix
PROTECT

Page

SECTION 2. — PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-3
Dress ................................................................................................... 4-3
Medical Cover ..................................................................................... 4-3
Reconnaissance .................................................................................. 4-3
Range Action Safety Plan ................................................................... 4-4
Briefings .............................................................................................. 4-5

SECTION 3. — RANGE DANGER AREAS FOR LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP


TRAINING
Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-7
Definitions ............................................................................................ 4-7
Purpose Built No Danger Area (NDA) Ranges ................................... 4-8
Purpose Built Limited Danger Area (LDA) Ranges ............................. 4-8
Purpose Built Full Danger Area (FDA) Ranges .................................. 4-9
200 Mils Rule ...................................................................................... 4-9

SECTION 4. —– COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR LIVE


FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING
Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-11
Use of Flags ........................................................................................ 4-11
Words of Command ............................................................................ 4-12
Suspension of Firing ........................................................................... 4-12
Safety Supervision .............................................................................. 4-13
Inspections .......................................................................................... 4-13
Ammunition ......................................................................................... 4-14
Falling Plates ....................................................................................... 4-16
Hearing Protection .............................................................................. 4-18

SECTION 5. — CONDUCT OF LIVE FIRING WITH SERVICE WEAPONS


BY CIVILIANS

Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-23


Use of Service Small Arms by Civilians .............................................. 4-23

SECTION 6. — AIR RIFLE RANGES


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-25
Definitions ............................................................................................ 4-25
Cost and Availability ............................................................................ 4-25
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-25
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ....................................................... 4-25
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-26
Preparation and Testing ...................................................................... 4-26
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-26
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-26

x PROTECT
PROTECT

Page

Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-27


Perimeter Marking ............................................................................... 4-27
Certification/Inspection ........................................................................ 4-27

SECTION 7. — THE TRAINING THEATRE AND INDOOR RIMFIRE RANGES


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-29
Range Danger Area ............................................................................. 4-29
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-29
Qualifications........................................................................................ 4-30
Actions By RCO ................................................................................... 4-30
Testing .................................................................................................. 4-31
Restrictions........................................................................................... 4-31
Conduct ................................................................................................ 4-31
Weapon Safety..................................................................................... 4-32

SECTION 8. — MOBILE AND PORTABLE RANGES (RIMFIRE)


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-34
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-34
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-35
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-35
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-35
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-36
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-36
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-37

SECTION 9. — TUBE AND ENCLOSED RANGES


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-38
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-38
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-38
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-39
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-39
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-40
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-40
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-41

SECTION 10. — THE 1908 DESIGN BARRACK RANGE


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-42
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-42
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-42
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-43
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-43
Testing ................................................................................................. 4-44
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-44
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-45
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-45

PROTECT xi
PROTECT

Page

SECTION 11. — THE 25 METRE BARRACK RANGE


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-46
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-46
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-46
Rules for Use ...................................................................................... 4-46
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-47
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-47
Testing ................................................................................................. 4-48
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-48
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-49
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-49

SECTION 12. — THE GALLERY RANGE (GR) AND CONVERTED GALLERY


RANGE (CGR)
Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-50
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-50
Falling Plate Targets ............................................................................ 4-50
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-50
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-51
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-51
Testing ................................................................................................. 4-52
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-53
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-53
Gallery Range (Control of the Butts and Markers Gallery) ................. 4-54
Converted Gallery Range (Control of the Console) ............................ 4-56
Ammunition ......................................................................................... 4-57
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-57

SECTION 13. — THE ELECTRIC TARGET RANGE (ETR)


Introduction .......................................................................................... 4-59
Range Danger Area ............................................................................ 4-59
Falling Plate Targets ............................................................................ 4-59
Accidents, Incidents and Defects ........................................................ 4-59
Qualifications ....................................................................................... 4-60
Actions by RCO ................................................................................... 4-60
Testing ................................................................................................. 4-61
Restrictions .......................................................................................... 4-61
Conduct ............................................................................................... 4-62
Weapon Safety .................................................................................... 4-63

Annex A An Example of a Range Action Safety Plan (RASP) ........ 4A-1

xii PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr10

CHAPTER 5. — WEAPON HANDLING TESTS


(MISCELLANEOUS WEAPONS AND PYROTECHNICS)
SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Scope ................................................................................................... 5-1
WHTs General Instructions .................................................................. 5-1
Layout................................................................................................... 5-1
Frequency ............................................................................................ 5-1
Conduct And Testing ............................................................................ 5-1
Use of Pyrotechnics by Cadets ............................................................ 5-2
The No. 8 Rifle ..................................................................................... 5-3
The L98A1 Cadet GP Rifle................................................................... 5-7
The L81A2 Cadet Target Rifle.............................................................. 5-12
The L85A2 Rifle ................................................................................... 5-17
L86A2 LSW .......................................................................................... 5-22
The L98A2 Cadet GP Rifle .................................................................. 5-27
Simulator Battle Sound (SBS) L35A1 .................................................. 5-35
Snike Screening Grenade L72 & L83 .................................................. 5-37
L50 Signal Smoke Grenade ................................................................. 5-39
Signal Smoke Grenade L64-L71 and L100/L101 Series ..................... 5-41
Rocket Hand Fired L10A1, L11A1 and L12A1 ..................................... 5-43
Rocket Hand Fired L5A4...................................................................... 5-45
Signal Kit Pyrotechnic 16 mm Miniflare ............................................... 5-47
Flare Tripwire Kit L10A1....................................................................... 5-50
L1A1 Smoke Generator ....................................................................... 5-55

CHAPTER 6. — TRAINING SIMULATION


SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION
Purpose ................................................................................................ 6-1
Referencing .......................................................................................... 6-1

SECTION 2. — PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING ON


THE DISMOUNTED CLOSE COMBAT TRAINER
Introduction........................................................................................... 6-2
Dress .................................................................................................... 6-2
Medical Cover ...................................................................................... 6-2
Reconnaissance................................................................................... 6-2
Range Action and Safety Plan (RASP)................................................ 6-3
Qualifications........................................................................................ 6-4
Briefings ............................................................................................... 6-4
Safety Supervisors ............................................................................... 6-5

SECTION 3. — COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR TRAINING


IN THE DISMOUNTED CLOSE COMBAT TRAINER
Introduction........................................................................................... 6-6
Words of Command ............................................................................. 6-6

PROTECT xiii
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Inspections ........................................................................................... 6-7


Use of the DCCT Range by Cadet Services........................................ 6-7
Use of the DCCT Range by Civilians................................................... 6-8
Accidents/Incidents............................................................................... 6-9
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure No. Page

1 MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log ......................................... 1-13/14


2 MOD Form 906A — Land Range Log ...................................... 1-15/16
2-1 Range Authorisation Certificate ................................................. 2-7
3a Army Form B159A ..................................................................... 4-19
3b Army Form B159B ..................................................................... 4-20
4 Layout of a 10 Lane Range for Falling Plates Showing the
Position for Unprotected Falling Plates on the Stop Butt ......... 4-21
5 Layout of a 12 Lane Range for Falling Plates Showing the
Position for Unprotected Falling Plates on the Mantlet ............ 4-22
6 RDA for Portable Air Rifle Ranges ............................................ 4-28

xiv PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt1/Apr/10

REFERENCES AND ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS

For the latest edition and/or amendments of each publication see ‘Catalogue of Army
Publications’ Parts 1 and 2, Army Code No. 12123.

References Code No. Title

A JSP 403 Handbook of Defence Land Ranges Safety


Vol II Design, Construction and Maintenance of Small
Arms, Infantry Weapon Systems and 30 mm
Weapon System Ranges.

B Reserved

C 71062 Infantry Training Volume IV, Ranges, Pamphlet


No. 20 Competition Shooting.

D JSP 403 Policy, Responsibilities, Authorisation,


Vol I Maintenance and Inspection of Land Ranges.

E 71855 Infantry Training Volume IV, Ranges, Pamphlet


No. 21, Regulations for Training with Armoured
Fighting Vehicles, Infantry Weapon Systems and
Pyrotechnics.

F JSP 403 Handbook of Defence Land Ranges Safety


Vol IV Glossary of Terms and Definitions.

G 71718 Infantry Training Volume III, Skill at Arms


(Section and Platoon Weapons), Pamphlet No.
13, Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated
Equipment.

PROTECT xv
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Associated Publications
71717 Infantry Training Volume I, Skill at Arms
(Individual Training), Pamphlet No. 2, Fieldcraft,
Battle Lessons and Exercises.
71807 Infantry Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), Pamphlet No. 5, The SA80
A2 (5.56 mm) System.
JSP 315 Services Accommodation Code.
JSP 445 Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road, Rail
and Sea.
JSP 535 Cadet Training Safety Precautions (The Red
Book).
13150 Ammunition and Explosives Regulations (Land
Service), Volume 2, Unit Ammunition Storage and
Handling.
60993 Material Regulations for the Army, Volume I,
Material Management and Supply, Pamphlet No.
3, Ammunition.
61573 Ammunition and Explosives Regulations (Land
Services), Volume 1, Pamphlet No. 11, Action in
Connection with Reporting Defects, Performance
Failures and Accidents.
LANDSO 1403 (Air Danger Areas)
LANDSO 1404 (Training Safety Overseas)
LANDSO 1405 (Training Risk Assessments)
LANDSO 1408 (Royal Flights)
LANDSO 3202 (Reporting Accidents)
Pam 5-C 71807-C The L98A2 Cadet GP Rifle (5.56 mm), L86A2
Light Support Weapon and Associated
Equipment

xvi PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

INFANTRY TRAINING
VOLUME IV – RANGES
Pamphlet No. 21-C
REGULATIONS FOR CADETS TRAINING WITH CADET
AND INFANTRY WEAPON SYSTEMS
AND PYROTECHNICS (2008)
INTRODUCTION

General
1. This pamphlet is for use by trained personnel who are qualified to plan, conduct
or authorised to supervise training for Cadet Forces with Infantry Weapon Systems
(Inf WS) and Cadet Weapon Systems (Cadet WS) in accordance with the
qualifications awarded in Chapter 2 to this pamphlet. It is not approved for use by
personnel who are not qualified nor authorised.

Regulations
2. This pamphlet covers the planning, conduct and supervision of firing and training
with Inf WS and Cadet WS and Pyrotechnics on all types of ranges and training areas.
The application of the regulations is mandatory as they are approved best practice,
enabling realistic and demanding training to be conducted whilst ensuring that risks
are reduced to As Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP).

Associated Publications
3. Those responsible for training are to be familiar with the safety rules and limitations
contained in Volume 2 of the Limitations in the Use of Missiles and Ammunition for
Training (LUMAT), the relevant Cadet Shooting Publication, any relevant parts of the
Joint Service Publication (JSP) 403 — Handbook of Defence Land Range Safety and
the appropriate General Staff Publication (GSP) and JSP 535 Cadet Training Safety
Precautions (The Red Book).

Layout and Scope of the Pamphlet


4. The pamphlet is structured to follow the prescribed progression of training
associated with Inf and Cadet WS. The leading sections of each chapter deal with
those aspects that are common to all ranges or activities in that chapter and should
always be studied before referring to a specific section that deals with the range or
type of exercise to be conducted. The chapters are as follows:

PROTECT xvii
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

a. Chapter 1 — General. This chapter explains the Infantry Training Safe


System and provides the information and regulations that are relevant to all
forms of training with Inf and Cadet WS. In particular it defines the
responsibilities of key personnel and explains the criteria by which personnel
are permitted to undertake training with Inf and Cadet WS. It should be studied
before reference is made to other specific chapters.
b. Chapter 2 — Qualification. This chapter lists the qualifying courses and
stipulates the rules governing the awarding of the qualifications necessary to
plan, conduct and supervise all forms of live and blank firing training with Inf and
Cadet WS.
c. Chapter 3 — Training with Blank Ammunition and Pyrotechnics. This
chapter details the regulations and safety rules that are applicable to training
exercises where blank ammunition and pyrotechnics are used. It is always to be
read in conjunction with the specific GSP for the ammunition natures and
pyrotechnics to be used.
d. Chapter 4 — Live Firing Marksmanship Training. This chapter details the
rules that regulate LFMT practices fired on purpose built Small Arms Ranges.
e. Chapter 5 — Weapon Handling Tests for Weapons and Pyrotechnics
issued to Cadet Forces. This chapter details the WHT for weapons and
pyrotechnics which may be issued to Cadets and Cadet Force Adult Volunteers
(CFAVs).
f. Chapter 6— Simulation. This chapter details the rules that regulate the
use of simulation with Inf WS and Cadet WS.

Range Orders and Range Byelaws


5. The regulations contained in this pamphlet are to be applied in conjunction with
local Range Standing Orders, Range Orders and Range Byelaws. If any of these
orders are in contradiction to the pamphlet then the local orders will take precedence.
However, such local orders are not to be less stringent than the procedures detailed in
this pamphlet. In cases of concern advice may be sought from HQ SASC.

Training on Foreign Ranges and Training Areas

6. Where there is a requirement to use other nation’s ranges or training facilities,


JSP403 Volume 1 is to be read, and the rules contained therein are to be complied
with. Further advice may be sought from HQ SASC, Warminster Military (94381) Ext
2366/2612, Warminster Civil (01985) 222366/222612.

xviii PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

JSP 403 — Handbook of Defence Land Range Safety

7. JSP 403 provides a comprehensive handbook covering aspects of range safety,


other than procedural, on MOD Land Ranges. There are five volumes to this
publication. In particular Volume 2 covers the design and construction of Land
Ranges, including RDA/WDA templates and targetry for Inf and Cadet WS.

PROTECT xix
PROTECT

xx PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Chapter 1

GENERAL
CONTENTS

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION 1-1

SECTION 2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS ALL FORMS OF FIRING 1-5

SECTION 3. RANGE ORDERS AND RANGE LOGS 1-11

SECTION 4. MEDICAL SUPPORT 1-17

SECTION 5. STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION OF AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES 1-19

SECTION 6. AMMUNITION ACCIDENT, INCIDENT AND WEAPON/AMMUNITION DEFECT


REPORTING PROCEDURE 1-20

ANNEX A EXAMPLES OF A MEDICAL RISK ASSESSMENT 1A-1

ANNEX B AMMUNITION ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORT 1B-1

ANNEX C BLINDS OR MISFIRES REPORT 1C-1

ANNEX D NEGLIGENT DISCHARGE REPORT 1D-1

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION

Purpose CONTENTS

PURPOSE 1-1
0101. This chapter explains the Safe
System of Training and provides the informa- REFERENCING 1-1
tion and regulations that are relevant to all
forms of training with Infantry Weapons THE SAFE SYSTEM OF TRAINING 1-2
Systems (Inf WS) and Cadet Weapon HEARING PROTECTION 1-4
Systems (Cadet WS).

0102. It defines the responsibilities of key personnel and explains the criteria by
which personnel (regardless of service) are permitted to undertake training with Inf and
Cadet WS.

Referencing
0103. The sections in this chapter are relevant to all forms of live firing training cov-
ered by this pamphlet. It is essential that those planning, conducting or supervising
training are familiar with these sections before referencing the chapter dealing with
the training or specific range to be used.

PROTECT 1-1
Amdt 1/Apr10 PROTECT

The Safe System of Training

0104. Duty of Care. The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 (HSW Act) and
the Corporate Manslaughter Act places a duty on the MOD to conduct training in such
a way as to ensure, as far as reasonably practicable, that persons whether in the MOD
or not, are not exposed to risks to their health or safety.

0105. Training Safety. Training with Inf and Cadet WS is regulated by a formally
recognised and endorsed Safe System. When this system is in place it allows cadets
and CFAVs to train with Inf and Cadet WS, whilst reducing any associated risks to As
Low As Reasonably Practicable (ALARP) which is entirely in line with the HSW Act.
The component parts of the Safe System of Training with Inf WS and cadet WS are:

a. Safe Weapons and Ammunition. All weapons, ancillaries, ammunition


and pyrotechnics are exhaustively tested and certified as being Safe and
Suitable for Service (S3). The Project Team (PT) responsible for the weapon/
ammunition gives this certification.

b. Safe Ranges. Ranges are properly prescribed, clearly marked and


conform to the design and safety criteria given in JSP 403, Volumes 1 and 2,
including a regulated inspection programme.

c. Safe Planning and Conduct of Training. The officers, warrant officers and
non-commissioned officers and Cadet Force Adult Volunteers (CFAV) charged
with the safe planning, conduct and supervision of training with Inf and Cadet
WS and pyrotechnics are properly qualified and competent to discharge their
duties and responsibilities thus achieving the procedural safety as defined in
this pamphlet. Officers of the Small Arms School Corps (SASC) regulate the
awarding of Inf and Cadet WS Range Qualifications. They, as Advisors Infantry
Weapons (AIW) and the recognised Subject Matter Experts (SME) in all forms of
training with Inf and Cadet WS, ammunition and associated pyrotechnics, are
on the establishment of the qualifying authorities shown at Section 2 of Chapter
2. As AIW they are responsible for the application of best practice thereby
ensuring and maintaining the necessary high standards of instruction,
evaluation and testing, on courses where Range Qualifications are awarded.

d. Safe Exercising Cadets and Cadet Force Adult Volunteers. All exercising
cadets and Cadet Force Adult Volunteers are to be proven competent in the
handling and firing of the weapons, ammunition and pyrotechnics that they will
use, or are likely to use during the exercise or practice. They are to be trained
and experienced to undertake the demands and complexities of the training.
Cadets are strictly forbidden to be issued or use any form of pyrotechnics.

e. Investigation of Accidents. HQ Infantry have directed that there is to be a


formal accident investigation process in place to ensure that all serious or
potentially serious accidents are investigated to prevent recurrence. SASC
Officers are directed by the Director of Infantry as the Competent Army Authority
(CAA) for all firing with Inf WS and Cadet WS to undertake this task when the
accident involves an Inf WS or cadet WS. In exceptional cirumstances Warrant

1-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Officers from the SASC may also be tasked. Where the accident is life
threatening the Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) may
also investigate.

0106. Delivery of Instruction. When a new Infantry Weapon System or Cadet


Weapon System is procured, the Design Authority will be invited to deliver training on
the system to a SASC SME. The SASC SME is then responsible in conjunction with
HQ SASC for producing an un-coded publication for endorsement. For Personal and
Individual weapon systems, having received the initial training, combined with the
endorsed publication, the SASC SME will cascade training to other SAA Instructors,
who will be able to train further SAA Instructors. In exceptional circumstances, and
only when endorsed by HQ SASC, it may be permissible for a SASC SME with an
endorsed publication to train himself on a new or unfamiliar weapon system.

0107. Pamphlet No. 21. Pamphlet No. 21 prescribes the rules and regulations
for the planning, conduct and supervision of firing and training with Inf WS and
pyrotechnics that are necessary to achieve procedural safety. This pamphlet is a
reduced version, based entirely on Pamphlet No. 21, specifically tailored for the firing
and training with Inf and Cadet WS by Cadets. Whenever conducting any form of live
or blank firing with Inf and Cadet WS, the RCO/ECO is to have in his possession a
hard copy of the current Pamphlet 21-C.

0108. Pamphlet No 21-C, Chapter 5. Chapter 5 of this pamphlet stipulates the


mandatory standards and qualifying periods that must be met in order to show that
cadets and CFAVs are competent to undertake training at the appropriate level with Inf
and Cadet WS or Pyrotechnics.

0109. Prerequisite Criteria for Training with Inf WS and Cadet WS. The
criteria that must be met before cadets and CFAVs can be permitted to train with Inf
WS and Cadet WS and pyrotechnics is:

a. Formally Trained. Having been formally trained in accordance with the


appropriate General Staff Publication (GSP) to handle and fire any weapon,
ammunition and pyrotechnic that the individual cadet and CFAVs may be
required to handle and fire during an exercise or practice with either live or blank
ammunition. Initial training for any weapon must have been given by a
competent and qualified SAA instructor.

b. Formally Tested. Having passed the appropriate Weapon Handling Test


(WHT) within the qualifying period specified in Chapter 5 of this pamphlet. The
result is to be recorded on the cadet’s Standardise Record, WESTMINSTER,
BADER or P File. WHTs may only be conducted by a course trained and qualified
SAA instructor, who must be current with the weapon system being used for the
test.

c. Progression of Training. Having been trained following the approved


progression of training with Inf and Cadet WS prescribed in the Cadet Syllabus.

PROTECT 1-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. Practical Understanding. Having been suitably briefed on the require-


ments and constraints of the exercise or practice.

0110. Live Firing Practices. Only authorised live firing practices that are
contained within Cadet manuals may be fired during Live Firing Marksmanship
Training (LFMT) on purpose built ranges. Under no circumstances are cadets or
CFAV to conduct any form of Live Firing Marksmanship Training at night.
Hearing Protection
0111. Definition. The term ‘issued, serviceable hearing protection’ is used
throughout this pamphlet to describe the minimum acceptable level of hearing
protection that is required to be worn for all types of live and blank firing training
including pyrotechnics.
a. Serviceable hearing protection is defined as either:
(1) Ear Muffs. As a result of a visual inspection ear muffs are seen to
be intact, with no obvious damage to the casing or seals. The sound
dampening material is to be in place and the headband is of sufficient
tension to achieve a proper seal (Ear Muffs are to be inspected in
accordance with the information contained in Material Regulations
Volume 3, Part 1, Section 11.).
(2) Foam Ear Plugs. As a result of a visual inspection foam ear plugs
are seen to be clean and supple, thereby retaining the properties to
expand and provide effective protection. Typically these should be worn
only once.
(3) Automatic Noise Reduction Headsets. As a result of a visual
inspection ear muffs are seen to be intact, with no obvious damage to the
casing or seals. The sound dampening material is to be in place and the
headband is of sufficient tension to achieve a proper seal (Ear Muffs are to
be inspected in accordance with the information contained in Material
Regulations Volume 3, Part 1, Section 11.).
b. Where there is a requirement for double hearing protection this is achieved
by wearing both forms of hearing protection simultaneously.
0111. Recommendations for Use. Wherever possible protection should be
achieved by the wearing of the plastic muff type protectors. Where this is not possible
(for example when wearing a radio headset), the expanding foam ear plugs are a
suitable alternative. Personnel should be aware that anything that interferes with the
seal between the ear muff and the skin, such as the pulled-down side of the beret, will
greatly reduce the level of protection and therefore, must be avoided.
0113. – 0117. Reserved.

1-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 2. — RESPONSIBILITIES AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS


ALL FIRING

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 1-5
0118. Range/training area space and time
DEFINITIONS (QUALIFIED, CURRENT AND
are always at a premium. Every effort must COMPETENT) 1-5
be made to use a range/training area
RESPONSIBILITIES OF EXERCISE
allocation to the full. Planning must be DIRECTOR, PLANNING, CONDUCTING AND
carried out to ensure that firing starts at the SAFETY STAFF 1-6
beginning of the allotted period. Breaks must EXERCISING CADETS 1-8
be kept to a minimum and administration DRESS 1-8
must not delay firing.
MEDICAL COVER 1-9

0119. Long term planning is normal for WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS 1-9


range/training area allocation. Maximum RISK ASSESSMENTS 1-10
effect can therefore be gained by early bids. LIMITATIONS IN THE USE OF MISSILES AND
Standby arrangements to accept last minute AMMUNITION FOR TRAINING (LUMAT) 1-10
cancellations by other units can prove BRIEFINGS 1-10
beneficial. Full use of unit facilities, eg 25
metre Barrack, Indoor and Tube ranges, should be considered.

0120. Training Objectives (TOs). Before detailed planning can start, the TOs to be
achieved, the number of cadets to be exercised and the staff available must be
determined and agreed by the Senior Planning Officer.

Definitions (Qualified, Current and Competent)

0121. Qualified. To be deemed qualified individuals must have attended and


passed one of the qualifying courses laid down in Chapter 2 and have achieved the
required standard necessary to carry out their appointment. For further details see
Chapter 2.

0122. Authorised. The only course in which a CFAV can be authorised in is the
Ancillary Range Duties Course (ARD). To be deemed authorised individuals must
have attended and passed the course using the Course Folder issued by Cadet
Training Centre Frimley (CTC) to ensure that they are able to undertake their duties
completely. the CO must sign a Range Authorisation Certificate for the individual (see
Fig 2-1). Further details can be found within Chapter 2.

0123. Current. To be deemed current an individual must be familiar with the


most up-to-date rules and regulations contained in those documents that govern the
regulations for the planning, conduct and supervision of firing including associated

PROTECT 1-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

publications applicable to the training taking place, for which an individual has
responsibility. An individual must also have passed the appropriate Weapon
Handling Test (WHT) within the specified time frame in accordance with Chapter 5 of
this pamphlet in order to be deemed current to use or supervise that weapon,
ammunition or pyrotechnic.

0124. Competent. To be deemed competent, an individual must be current,


qualified and possess the necessary skills, knowledge, attitude, training and
experience to participate, either as a member of exercise/range safety staff or as a
member of the exercising cadets or CFAVs.

Responsibilities of Exercise Director, Planning, Conducting and Safety Staff

0125. Exercise Director

a. It is the responsibility of the Exercise Director, (ie the person who directs
that training with Infantry or Cadet Weapon Systems (blank or live) or
pyrotechnics, is to be carried out (CO of a Unit) to appoint a Senior Planning
Officer.

b. The Exercise Director is to ensure that the Senior Planning Officer


appointed is competent, qualified and of the appropriate rank to supervise all
staff involved in the activity and of sufficient experience to match the
complexities of the exercise.

c. The Exercise Director cannot appoint himself to be the Senior Planning


Officer or any other appointment.

0126. Senior Planning Officer.

a. It is the responsibility of the Senior Planning Officer to appoint a Planning


Officer and a Range Conducting Officer or Exercise Conducting Officer. The
Senior Planning Officer is to ensure that they are:

(1) Competent, qualified and of sufficient experience to match the


complexity of the training.

(2) Given sufficient guidance, time, resources and manpower to be able


to plan, conduct and supervise the training, including the appropriate level
of medical cover.

b. The Senior Planning Officer cannot appoint himself to any of these


appointments. He has a duty to ensure that:

(1) The plan meets the requirements of the aim of the exercise.

1-6 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

(2) There are sufficient Safety Supervisors or Exercise Assistants and


they are competent to undertake their duties.

(3) The exercising cadets and CFAVs are competent to undertake the
exercise and have completed the necessary progression of training.

c. Once the Senior Planning Officer is satisfied that sufficient resources and
man power are available he is to inform the Exercise Director. However, if the
Senior Planning Officer considers there are insufficient resources or manpower
available, in particular, qualified safety staff or that the exercising cadets and
CFAVs are insufficiently prepared, then he is to refer the matter back to the
Exercise Director for a decision.
d. Should the Senior Planning Officer decide the RCO/ECO is not
competent, due to a lack of experience, he can nominate an experienced
RCO/ECO to conduct the activity and allow the inexperienced RCO/ECO to
understudy to gain the appropriate experience.
0127. Planning Officer. The Planning Officer is the officer, warrant officer, NCO
or CFAV who is appointed by the Senior Planning Officer and is responsible for the
design of the live or blank firing training with Infantry or Cadet Weapon Systems. The
Planning Officer is to be competent, qualified and may or may not be the
Range/Exercise Conducting Officer. He has a duty to ensure that:
a. A detailed plan is produced that meets the requirements of the aim of the
exercise and has considered and where appropriate included:
(1) The Safe System of Training, in particular the use of safe weapons
and ammunition, safe ranges/training areas, safe conducting and
supervising staff and safe exercising cadets and CFAVs.
(2) The prerequisite criteria for training with Inf and Cadet WS and
Pyrotechnics.
(3) The rules and regulations contained in the relevant chapters of this
pamphlet and other relevant publications.
b. If as a result of this detailed planning the Planning Officer considers there
are insufficient resources or manpower available then he is to refer the matter
back to the Senior Planning Officer for a decision.
0128. Senior Range Conducting Officer. A Senior Range Conducting Officer
(SRCO) who is competent and qualified will be appointed by the Senior Planning
Officer for exercises that involve subordinate RCOs who are responsible for elements
of an exercise under the overall control and coordination of the SRCO. The SRCO
may also be the Senior Planning Officer.
0129. Range Conducting Officer. The Range Conducting Officer (RCO) is the
officer, warrant officer, NCO or CFAV appointed by the Senior Planning Officer to be
responsible for the safe conduct of the firing as specified by the Senior Planning

PROTECT 1-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Officers plan in accordance with the relevant Service range instructions. The RCO is
to be competent with the weapon systems being used and qualified and may also be
the Planning Officer or Senior Range Conducting Officer. He will be assisted by a
number of Safety Supervisors. Whilst the RCO should not act as a dedicated Safety
Supervisor there may be occasions when he could be required to intervene in the role
of a Safety Supervisor.
0130. Safety Supervisor. The ratio/level of supervision required for a particular
exercise or range practice is to be determined by the Senior Planning Officer,
guidance to the minimum required is given in the relevant chapters of this publication.
The appointed Safety Supervisors are to be competent and are to be stipulated in the
RASP. Safety Supervisors are responsible for the safe supervision of firing as directed
by the RCO.

0131. Exercise Conducting Officer. The Exercise Conducting Officer (ECO) is


the officer/warrant officer, NCO or CFAV appointed by the Senior Planning Officer to
be responsible for the safe conduct of the firing as specified by the Senior Planning
Officers plan in accordance with the relevant Service instructions. The ECO is to be
competent with the weapon system being used, qualified and of appropriate rank and
experience to match the complexity of the exercise being conducted; the ECO may
also be the Planning Officer. The ECO is to ensure the regulations laid down in the
relevant publications for the use of blank ammunition and pyrotechnics are complied
with. He may be assisted by a number of Exercise Assistants. He is also to ensure that
if Pyrotechnics are require to be destroyed in situ, they are only destroyed by the ATO,
he is to be fully aware of the correct procedures for contacting the ATO.

0132. The Exercise Assistants. The Exercise Assistants are appointed by the
Senior Planning Officer. They are responsible for the safe conduct of those aspects of
an exercise involving blank ammunition or pyrotechnics that are allotted to him. There
is no minimum qualification, however, the Exercise Assistant is to be current with the
Inf and Cadet WS and pyrotechnics he is supervising, being briefed by the ECO and
hold the minimum rank of LCpl or CFAV.

Exercising Cadets and CFAVs

0133. All exercising cadets and CFAVs must have completed the progression of
training appropriate to the level of live firing activity and be current with the weapon/s
and pyrotechnics to be used. This training is to be documented and the testing is to be
carried out by an appropriately qualified SAA instructor. Chapter 5 of this pamphlet
stipulates the mandatory standards and qualifying period that must be met for each
level of live firing activity for all Infantry and Cadet Weapon Systems.

Dress

0134. The dress for Live Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT) is specified in the
cadet manual and ensures that personnel are able to meet the shooting standard
wearing the appropriate dress and equipment.

1-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Medical Cover

0135. The Planning Officer/RCO/ECO is responsible for conducting a medical risk


assessment, ensuring the level of medical cover is appropriate to the scale of the
training (see Section 4 of Chapter 1). He must refer the matter to the Senior Planning
Officer if this level cannot be achieved.

Written Instructions

0136. Written instructions are required to support all training activities involving the
use of live ammunition, blank ammunition and pyrotechnics. Such instructions should
conform to the conventions and disciplines of Defence Writing. Qualifying courses
teach a standard format for each of the different types of written instructions that are
required. These are:

a. Range Action and Safety Plan (RASP). It is mandatory for a RASP to be


produced specific to each live firing activity with Inf and Cadet WS or
pyrotechnics. It is to be produced by the Planning Officer or the RCO as a
stand-alone document or included as an annex to the Co-ordinating
Instruction. In any event copies of the RASP are to be issued to all staff
employed on the exercise/activity. In the event that a Coordinating Instruction
is not produced there will be a need to include some of the administrative
topics in the RASP. An example of the possible headings to be included in the
RASP for a LFMT activity fired on a Purpose Built Range is given at Annex A to
Chapter 4. The purpose of the RASP is to:

(1) Show that the Planning Officer/RCO has followed an acknowledged


planning process, covering all aspects of safe training and as such it
provides a clear audit trail.

(2) Give a detailed brief of the RCO’s personal responsibilities on the


range before, during and after firing.

(3) Detail the responsibilities of Safety Supervisors and other range staff.

(4) Describe the rehearsal/walkthrough procedures.

(5) Detail the points/subjects that are to be covered during safety


briefings to all range staff and participating cadets and CFAVs.

b. Exercise Action and Safety Plan (EASP). The production of an EASP


specific to each exercise is a mandatory requirement for any training activity
involving the use of blank ammunition and pyrotechnics. An example of the
possible headings to be included in the EASP is given at Annex A to Chapter 3.

PROTECT 1-9
Andt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0137. If, in exceptional circumstances, RCOs/ECOs are using written instructions


produced by someone else, they must check thoroughly and countersign the
written instructions before using them. The responsibility for any deficiency of
the written instructions passes to the RCO/ECO once the written instruction has
been countersigned.

Risk Assessments

0138. Commanders at all levels have a personal responsibility for ensuring that
activities are undertaken in as safe a manner as is reasonably practicable, taking due
regard of any risks to personnel. Although the mechanism for discharging this duty
can be delegated and assistance and support obtained, the responsibility cannot be.

0139. Notwithstanding the requirement for a Medical Risk Assessment (see Section
4 to this chapter) training with weapon systems is covered through the provision of all
aspects of the Safe System of Training outlined in the Foreword to this chapter.
Therefore, providing all aspects of the planned training are covered by the Safe System
of Training, there is no requirement to conduct independent risk assessments. If any
aspect of training is not covered by the Safe System of Training then that aspect must
be subjected to a risk assessment and additional control measures to reduce risk to As
Low as Reasonably Practicable (ALARP) must be implemented. Any risk assessment
is to be recorded and attached to the coordinating instruction or RASP/ EASP along
with the 2* dispensation. Risk assessment is detailed in JSP 375.

Limitations in the Use of Missiles and Ammunition for Training (LUMAT)

0140. LUMAT details the definitive limitations placed on the use of ammunition and
pyrotechnics. Some of the information it contains, but by no means all, is reproduced
in this pamphlet. To ensure any limitations are taken into account during the planning
phase, Planning Officers must ensure that LUMAT is consulted for any activity where
the intention is to use ammunition or pyrotechnics.

0141. Radio Frequency Emission Hazard. No mobile phone or other electrical


equipment is to be switched on within 5 m of any electrically initiated weapon system
or explosive store on a range.

Briefings

0142. Comprehensive briefings will reduce the possibility of accidents. Briefings for
LFMT on the ranges covered in Chapter 4 should follow the format at Annex A to
Chapter 4.

0143. – 0149. Reserved.

1-10 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 3. — RANGE ORDERS AND RANGE LOGS

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 1-11
0150. Range orders for purpose built
ranges are provided to ensure the following: HANDOVER/TAKEOVER 1-12

a. All necessary controls, as identified TRAINING ON OTHER NATIONS’ FACILITIES 1-12


by the risk assessment completed by
the Range Administering Unit (RAU), are in place to prevent accidents to the
range users, range staff or the public.

b. The correct implementation of any range by-laws, where these have been
made, the public are put on notice that the range area is a dangerous place.

c. Maximum use is made of the range space available.

d. Guidance is given to users unfamiliar with the facilities provided.

0151. The following orders are to be read before live firing training commences:

a. Range Standing Orders. These cover the general conduct for a large
range complex and are often initiated at Command or District level.

b. Range Orders. These are specific to a particular range within the


complex or orders for an isolated range location. They will reflect information
contained on the MOD Form 904 (Land Range Authorisation Certificate).

c. MOD Form 904 – Land Range Authorisation Certificate. This states the
weapons systems, munitions and explosive stores which can be used on the
range.

d. MOD Form 905 – Land Range Safety Certificate. This certifies that the
range is safe and suitable for use as prescribed on the MOD Form 904.

e. Unit Standing Orders. As applicable.

0152. It is essential that all concerned with planning and conducting live firing or
blank firing training read the relevant orders BEFORE planning starts. It follows that
Senior Planning Officers/Planning Officers and SRCO/RCO are to insist that a copy of
the Range Orders and the MOD Form 904 are made available to be studied. This
applies equally to an indoor air rifle range as to a Gallery Range.

0153. The relevant section in this pamphlet relating to the ammunition, weapon or
range to be used is to be studied in conjunction with the Range Orders. The orders for
a particular location will often be quite varied as they must suit the area, and local
conditions to which they relate. If the orders are in contradiction to this pamphlet then

PROTECT 1-11
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

the local orders take precedence, however, such local orders are not to be less safe
than the procedures detailed in this pamphlet. In cases of concern advice must be
sought from HQ SASC.

Handover/Takeover

0154. Before handing over or taking over a range the SRCO/RCO is to complete
MOD Form 906 or MOD Form 906A — Land Range Log (see Figs 1 and 2). Each
entry in the log identifies the user, records the number of rounds fired, provides a pre
and post firing certificate to be signed by the SRCO/RCO and gives brief details of all
incidents/accidents. MOD Form 906A also records any blinds. The Land Range Log is
also used to record routine inspections and maintenance work. Instructions on how to
complete the Land Range Log are contained on the inside cover.

0155. The SRCO/RCO is required to certify personally, by signature, that he


holds the correct qualification and that the Range Orders have been read and
understood and that they will be complied with in full. If, for any reason during
firing, the RCO has to leave the range he is to sign off in the MOD Form
906/906A and the replacement RCO is to sign on the range by completing the
relevant part of the MOD Form 906/906A prior to the continuation of firing.

Training on Other Nations’ Facilities

0156. Where there is a requirement to use other nations’ ranges and training
facilities, JSP 403 Vol 1 is to be read and the rules contained therein are to be
complied with. Further advice can be sought from HQ SASC, Warminster Military
(94381) Ext2366/2612, Warminster Civilian (01985) 222366/222612.

0157. – 0161. Reserved.

1-12 PROTECT
PROTECT

DLRSC Range Serial Number

(From MOD Form 904/905)

MOD Form 906


(Revised September 2001)

Land Range Log


The Log Records Activities at:
Name and Location of Range

Type of Range

Date Log Opened Date Log Closed

WARNING
It is essential that the officer i/c Practice / Senior Range Conducting Officer and all Inspecting Officers read
carefully the notes on the inside of the front cover before making entries in this log
Completed Land Range Logs are to be retained by the Range Administering Unit until such time as the range is
permanently closed or until their destruction is approved by the Range Authorising Headquarters.

As a minimum, each logbook should be retained for 10 years after its completion.

Produced by MOD, DSDA(PC)Ky. Tel: 0117 9376256

Notes SPACE FOR TRANSPARENT WALLET


CONTAINING
1. This Log provides a permanent record of the usage of the range named on the front cover. For each use of the facility it LAND RANGE SAFETY CERTIFICATE (MOD FORM 905)
records:

a. The Unit details, name, rank, and signature of the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer supervising the
(Provided for situations where it is impractical to display the MOD Form 905 permanently on the range)
firing. (columns [b], [e] & [f])
b. The date and time the range was in use. (columns [a], [d] & [g])
c. When applicable, the number of rounds fired. (columns [i] & [j])
d. Details of any range accident/incident, and action taken in response. (column [k])
e. Details of blinds not disposed of by the practising Unit. (column [k])
f. A declaration by the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer supervising the firing that the range was left
in a clean and safe condition. (column [I])

Completion by the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer.

2. On each occasion that the range is used and before firing commences, the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting
Officer is to complete columns [a] to [f]. In signing in column [f] the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer
affirms that he/she is qualified and/or authorised to conduct the firing practices for which the range has been allocated, that
the range is in a suitable condition to be used and that he/she has read and understood the Range Orders and will comply
with them throughout the practice. The Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer is to ensure that the range is
used strictly in accordance with current drills and procedures and, where applicable, that the use of target lanes is evenly
distributed.

3. The detail in columns [h] to [j] is only entered for indoor ranges and ranges with stop butts/bullet catchers which require de-
leading.

4. At the end of firing the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer is to complete columns [g] to [I]. In signing in
column [i] the Officer i/c Practice/Senior Range Conducting Officer further affirms that he/she has, on leaving the range,
cleared it of all ammunition and explosives or has informed the Range Officer if for any reason the range could not be
cleared. Unless the Range Orders state otherwise, range clearance includes the disposal of blinds.

5. Blinds not disposed of by the practising Unit are to be recorded in column [k] using the following format:

A. Ammunition nature.
B. Number of rounds.
C. Grid reference/s of blind/s.
D. Action taken by Unit.
E. Remarks.

Completion by the Range Staff.

6. Column [m] is initialled by a member of the Range Staff and indicates that the reports/remarks made in column [k] have
been noted for action.

Use as a Management Record.

7. The Range Log is also provided as a means of recording all other significant range events such as inspections, refurbishments
and butt de-leading. At the completion of any periodic inspection (see Note 8), the inspecting officer is to enter, on the next
available line, the date, time and type of inspection (e.g. "Range Officer's Monthly Inspection") and any relevant comments
or remarks. He/she must also enter his/her name, rank/grade, appointment and signature. A similar entry must be made by
the Range Officer on completion of any significant repair or refurbishment. These entries must be made in red ink to
distinguish them from range user entries.

8. The cycle of mandatory periodic inspections is as follows:

a. Monthly by an Officer of the Range Administering Unit.


b. Annually by an Officer from the Range Authorising Headquarters.
c. Two-yearly by a representative of the Works Services Organisation.
d. Three yearly (Open Ranges) or five yearly (Indoor Ranges) by an Independent Range Safety Inspector.

9. De-leading details should record the date de-leading was carried out, the lanes affected if all lanes were not de-leaded and
the signature of the member of the range staff responsible for ensuring that de-leading was properly carried out. The latter
applies even when de-leading is carried out by non-MOD personnel.

10. After de-leading, the cumulative total of rounds fired in column [j] must be re-set to zero.

General

11. Entries need not be limited to a single line for each firing practice. Full use should be made of the page if additional
information is required to be recorded and, if necessary, entries may be continued onto the next page of the Log.

Fig 1. — MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log

PROTECT 1-13
PROTECT

MOD Form 906 Log Sheet Page 1 of 28

Pre-firing Certificate Post Firing Certificate Initials of


Warning Rounds Fired Range
Time Lanes Remarks Warning
Read Note 2 on inside front cover before signing in column [f] (See Note 3) Staff
Strength Range Time off Used (Record all incidents, accidents and Read Notes 4 & 5 on
(See
Date User Unit of Firing Taken Range (See Total (All Firing Cumulative Total range items in need of repair) inside front cover before
Note 6)
Party Over Rank and Name Signature Note 3) Points Used) (See Note 10) (See Notes 4 & 5) signing below

[a] [b] [c] [d] [e] [f] [g] [h] [i] [j] [k] [l] [m]

Totals to carry forward to next page:

Totals to carry forward to next page:

Page 2 of 28 Log Sheet MOD Form 906

Pre-firing Certificate Post Firing Certificate Initials of


Warning Rounds Fired Range
Time Lanes Remarks Warning
Read Note 2 on inside front cover before signing in column [f] (See Note 3) Staff
Strength Range Time off Used (Record all incidents, accidents and Read Notes 4 & 5 on
(See
Date User Unit of Firing Taken Range (See Total (All Firing Cumulative Total range items in need of repair) inside front cover before
Note 6)
Party Over Rank and Name Signature Note 3) Points Used) (See Note 10) (See Notes 4 & 5) signing below

[a] [b] [c] [d] [e] [f] [g] [h] [i] [j] [k] [l] [m]

Totals to carry forward to next page:

Totals to carry forward to next page:

Fig 1 (cont). — MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log

1-14 PROTECT
PROTECT

MOD Form 906A


(Revised Jul 99)
MOD Form 906
(Introduced 7/90)

Land
LandRange
Range Log
Log
This Log Records Activities at
ThisName
Logand
Records
Location of Activities
Range at
Range Type and Location

Type of Range

Date Log Opened Date Log Closed

WARNING
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE OFFICER i/c PRACTICE / SENIOR RANGE CONDUCTING OFFICER AND ALL INSPECTING OFFICERS
READ CAREFULLY THE NOTES ON THE INSIDE OF THE FRONT COVER BEFORE MAKING ENTRIES IN THIS LOG

Completed Land Range Logs are to be retained by the Range Administering Unit until such time as the range is
permanently closed or until their destruction is approved by the Range Authorising Headquarters.
As a minimum, each logbook should be retained for 10 years after its completion

SPACE FOR TRANSPARENT WALLET


CONTAINING
LAND RANGE SAFETY CERTIFICATE (MOD FORM 905)

Fig 2. — MOD Form 906A — Land Range Log

PROTECT 1-15
PROTECT

MOD Form 906A Log Sheet Page 1 of 30


Strength Pre-firing Certificate AMMUNITION (See Notes 4 & 5)
of Firing Warning:
Range Detail Party Time Read Note 2 on inside Front Cover Time
Date (or equivalent) User Unit or No Start On before you sign in column (g) Off
Reference No of Firing Range Range
(See Note 3) vehicles Rank Signature Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds
and Name
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)

Totals Brought Forward from Previous Page

MOD Form 906


(Introduced 7/90)

Land Range Log


This Log Records Activities at
Range Type and Location

Totals to be Carried Forward to Next Page

MOD Form 906A Log Sheet Page 1 of 30

AMMUNITION (See Notes 4 & 5) Post Firing Certificate


Remarks
Warning: Initials of
Record all: incidents/accidents/blinds and Read Notes 5 & 6 on inside Range Staff
range items in need of repair Front Cover before (See Note
Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds Fired Blinds 7)
(See Note 5 & 6) signing Below

(s) (t) (u) (v) (w) (x) (y) (z) (aa) (bb) (cc) (dd) (ee) (ff) (gg)

MOD Form 906


(Introduced 7/90)

Land Range Log


This Log Records Activities at
Range Type and Location

Fig 2 (cont). — MOD Form 906A — Land Range Log

1-16 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 4. — MEDICAL SUPPORT


CONTENTS
General
GENERAL 1-17
0162. The level of medical cover required
for all types of training with ammunition and AIM 1-17

pyrotechnics is mandated by the Army MEDICAL RISK ASSESSMENT 1-17


Medical Directorate (AMD) who have
directed that personnel who are MATT 3 LEVEL OF MEDICAL COVER 1-18
Level 3 (Battlefield Casualty Drills) trained
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL PERSONNEL 1-18
represent the minimum level of medical
cover for simple low risk activities or as specified in JSP535. In order for training to be
conducted the appropriate medical cover is to be in place. Range Orders may state
the user unit’s responsibility for medical cover. Cadet organisations should refer to
JSP535 Cadet Training Safety Precautions in conjunction with this publication. Where
there is a difference the most stringent rules must be employed.
0163. Large range complexes may often be covered by nominated ambulance
vedette points with medical staff in attendance.
0164. Unless specified in Range Orders, range users are not to contact the
Emergency Services direct. All tasking is to be actioned by Range Control.

Aim
0165. Injuries resulting from the use of ammunition or pyrotechnics present an
immediate threat to life and limb. The primary aim, in all cases following an accident
involving injury to personnel, is to provide life saving first aid, followed by rapid
evacuation to an appropriate trauma facility. Training on ranges or training areas that
are more remote from a medical establishment or which will involve greater degrees
of complexity will require a higher level of intrinsic medical cover and evacuation
capability to ensure this aim is achieved.

Medical Risk Assessment


0166. The level of medical cover to be provided is to be determined following a
medical risk assessment conducted by the Planning Officer/RCO. LANDSO 1405
contains guidance on completing medical risk assessments. The result of the medical
risk assessment is to be recorded in the RASP or EASP. Examples of simple Medical
Risk Assessments are contained at Annex A to this chapter. The following factors are
to be considered in the medical risk assessment process:
a. Likelihood of accidents set against the level and type of training to be
conducted ie training with blank ammunition or LFMT.
b. The location of the range or training area in relation to the nearest medical
establishment providing trauma facilities, including:
(1) Vehicle access to the range or training area.

PROTECT 1-17
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(2) Standard of roads and tracks.


(3) Possible delays, including traffic.
(4) Requirement for a 4X4 vehicle or military ambulance.
c. Conditions under which the training is to be conducted, ie night training,
static or with fire and movement.
d. Ammunition natures or pyrotechnics to be used, ie blank or live small arms
ammunition.
e. The likely response time of the Emergency Services and their ability to
cope with multiple emergencies.

Level of Medical Cover


0167. On the basis of the results of the medical risk assessment, an appropriate
level of medical cover is to be determined. Advice from the medical officer must be
sought. The requirement for each of the following is to be assessed:
a. Need for medical personnel.
b. Numbers of medical personnel required.
c. Level of medical qualification required.
d. Equipment available to medical personnel.
e. Vehicles to be made available or required to be tasked for casualty transfer,
ie landrover, military ambulance, civilian ambulance or helicopter.
f. Communications to emergency services, eg locations of landline
telephones, use of radios, mobile phones, etc.
0168. When training with live, blank ammunition and pyrotechnics it is mandatory to
have medical cover. A CFAV with a current and recognised First Aid certificate and in
possession of an authorised First Aid kit are to be present throughout the training.
The person responsible must also take in account the current qualification held by the
available instructors for the activity being conducted, so all the necessary limitations
during the conduct of the training are taken, to ensure the safety of the cadets/CFAV
taking part.
Note. A list of recognised first aid certificates can be found in JSP 535, Cadet Training
safety Precautions (The Red Book).

Employment of Medical Personnel


0169. Medical personnel or nominated first aiders for a training activity are not to be
employed in any other role that might result in them becoming a casualty or prevent
them from discharging their duties in the event of an accident.
0170. – 0174. Reserved.

1-18 PROTECT
PROTECT

SECTION 5. — STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION OF AMMUNITION


AND EXPLOSIVES

Regulations
CONTENTS

0175. The rules governing the storage and REGULATIONS 1-19


movement of ammunition and explosives
are laid down in either JSP 482 — MOD Explosives Regulations (U) and JSP 445 —
Transport of Dangerous Goods by Road, Rail and Sea. These rules are to be
observed in training.

0176 – 0180. Reserved.

PROTECT 1-19
PROTECT

SECTION 6. — AMMUNITION ACCIDENT, INCIDENT AND WEAPON/


AMMUNITION DEFECT REPORTING PROCEDURE

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 1-20
0181. The most important evidence of the
efficiency of weapons and stocks of TYPES OF OCCURRENCE 1-21
ammunition for war, is to be found in the
TERMINOLOGY 1-21
performance of the weapons and ammunition
during training. Some defects or incidents may AMMUNITION ACCIDENTS 1-22
appear trivial and give the impression of not
assuming importance, but as with intelligence AMMUNITION INCIDENTS 1-23
information, they help to build an overall IMMEDIATE ACTION TO BE TAKEN
picture. The reasons for reporting all FOLLOWING AMMUNITION ACCIDENTS/
ammunition accidents, incidents and INCIDENTS 1-23

ammunition/weapon defects are: AMMUNITION/WEAPON DEFECT REPORTING 1-26

a. To prevent a recurrence. IMMEDIATE ACTION TO BE TAKEN


FOLLOWING AN AMMUNITION DEFECT 1-26
b. To comply with the statutory IMMEDIATE ACTION TO BE TAKEN
requirements of the Health and Safety FOLLOWING A WEAPON DEFECT 1-26
at Work etc. Act 1974, such as Duty of
AMMUNITION INCIDENT REPORTING
Care and regulations on reporting AGENCIES 1-27
dangerous occurrences made under
the Act, eg Reporting of Injuries, TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF RANGE
STAFF 1-29
Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences
Regulations (RIDDOR). NEGLIGENT DISCHARGES 1-30

c. To rectify or eliminate defective INVESTIGATION OF ACCIDENTS 1-31


weapons or ammunition throughout INCIDENT REPORTS — ACCIDENTS/
the Services. INCIDENTS AND MATTERS OF PUBLIC
INTEREST 1-31
d. To improve design and to provide
greater safety and better performance.

e. To change the drill where necessary.

f. To detect a pattern of degradation in performance, which might otherwise


go unnoticed.

g. To comply with NATO Standardisation Agreement (STANAG) 2940


Reporting of Major Ammunition Malfunctions.

0182. For the purpose of this publication the term ‘ammunition’ refers to all live,
blank, pyrotechnic munitions and explosives.

1-20 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

0183. Units are not to take a parochial view of ammunition accidents, incidents or
ammunition/weapon defects with ammunition and weapons issued to them for
training. The Unit and the SRCO/RCO/ECO have a responsibility to all others using
similar weapons or ammunition in promptly reporting the facts of any accident,
incident or defect to the relevant authorities in accordance with this publication.

Types of Occurrence

0184. This publication defines three classes of occurrences which SRCOs/RCOs/


ECOs must be aware of, as the reporting procedure for each varies slightly. These
and their definitions are given below:

a. Ammunition Accident. Irrespective of cause or however minor, an


ammunition accident is any unintended event or sequence of events involving
ammunition that results in death or injury to a person(s) and/or damage to
equipment and/or property, military or civilian. Events such as fires, or any
functioning of ammunition which occurs during storage or movement, are to be
classified as accidents, irrespective of whether they result in death, injury or
damage to either civilian or military owned equipment or property.

b. Ammunition Incident. Irrespective of cause or however minor, an


ammunition incident is any unplanned occurrence that does not fall within the
definition of an ammunition accident.

c. Defects. A defect is any fault in the make-up or marking or any


deterioration in, or damage to, the physical state of weapons, equipment,
ammunition, ammunition containers or Unit Load Specification (ULS).

Terminology

0185. Blind. A blind is the term used when an item of ammunition is initiated (fired
or thrown) but fails to function correctly at the target.

0186. Breech Explosion. A breech explosion is the uncontrolled initiation of a


round in the breech of a weapon when fired. The round may not have been
chambered or only partially chambered.

0187. Cook-off. A cook-off is the uncontrolled functioning of ammunition caused


by excessive heat.

0188. Error in Drill. An error in drill occurs when the authorised and/or laid down
drills are found to be at fault and require to be revised.

PROTECT 1-21
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0189. Error of Drill. An error of drill is defined as an instance when the


ammunition or weapon has not been operated in strict accordance with the GSP. For
example, excessive build up of carbon on or in a weapon due to inadequate cleaning
can result in irregular performance of the ammunition or when ordered to fire single
shots a burst is fired as a result of the firer not checking the change lever.
Note: Errors of drill are one of the major causes of ammunition accidents and
incidents. Reporting such instances even when the ammunition or the weapon is
obviously not to blame, enables the Project Team (PT) and Competent Army Authority
(CAA) to establish a pattern highlighting hazardous practices, or where necessary,
recommend an amendment to the GSP.
0190. Hangfire. A hangfire is the temporary failure or delay in the functioning of a
primer, igniter or propelling charge. A hangfire occurs if the primer, igniter or
propelling charge fails to function on initiation but subsequently functions during a laid
down safe waiting period.
0191. Misfire. A misfire is a term used when an item of ammunition, when
initiated, fails to fire or launch.
0192. Negligent Discharge. The discharge of any weapon or pyrotechnic that is
considered by the SRCO/RCO/ECO or chain of command, to be in contravention of the
authorised drills and procedures is classed as a Negligent Discharge and contrary to the
provisions given in Queen’s Regulations. All Negligent Discharges with Inf and Cadet
WS and Pyrotechnics are to be reported to the local ATO who will then forward them to
the Munitions Incident Database (MID) Cell for collation. A copy of the Negligent
Discharge Report Form 1664 contained in JSP482 Volume 2, Chapter B is to be
forwarded to the relevant organisation.
0193. Premature. A premature is a performance failure where the ammunition
functioned before the designed time.
0194. Performance Failures. This is the failure of ammunition or of any of its
constituent parts to function as intended, when fired, or tested. Examples are misfires,
hangfires, blinds, excessive deviations in range or line.

Ammunition Accidents
0195. SRCOs/RCOs or ECOs are to ensure they are fully conversant with the
procedures required for dealing with ammunition accidents.
0196. Examples of ammunition accidents are:
a. A breech explosion occurs in a weapon and causes damage to the working
parts.
b. A Simulator Battle Sound explodes in close proximity to a cadet causing injury.
c. A ricochet hits and damages a vehicle parked on the range.

1-22 PROTECT
PROTECT

Ammunition Incidents

0197. SRCOs/RCOs or ECOs are to ensure that they are fully conversant with the
procedures required for dealing with ammunition incidents.

0198. Examples of ammunition incidents are:

a. After throwing a smoke grenade it bursts into flames.

b. Rounds are reported to have landed outside the WDA.

Immediate Action To Be Taken Following Ammunition Accidents/Incidents

0199. In any accident involving ammunition any person involved with the activity
can and should issue the command “Stop, Stop, Stop”. Once the command is
issued all firing or movement is to cease and personnel are to wait for further direction
from the Range Safety Staff. It is then the responsibility of the SRCO/RCO or ECO to
ensure that the following actions are taken:

ITEM ACTION REMARKS


(a) (b) (c)
1 CEASE FIRING All firing is to cease.
2 FIRST AID Injured personnel are to be given first aid treatment. In the
(If required) case of fatal accidents, bodies should not be touched except
to confirm death. Out of respect bodies should be covered
until they can be removed from the scene.
3 MEDICAL Once first aid has been administered, medical assistance
ASSISTANCE should be sought. All injured personnel should be seen by a
(If required) doctor as soon as possible.
4 WEAPONS SAFETY Do not attempt to unload, make safe, strip or clean any
(PRESERVATION OF weapon involved in the accident, unless not doing so
EVIDENCE) would further increase the risk to personnel, or alter any
bearing, range or elevation setting. (If necessary move all
personnel to a safe area.)
5 INFORM RANGE In some cases this will be the Range Administrative Unit
CONTROL AND (RAU). Range Control or the RAU will give advice on how to
EXERCISE contact other agencies. It is a Unit responsibility to ensure
DIRECTOR the correct reporting procedure is followed.
6 INFORM ATO/SASC The ATO and HQ SASC are to be contacted by the fastest
possible means. The ATO will attend the scene. This proce-
dure should be known prior to the exercise taking place (see
paragraph 01109). An example of the format for reporting
can be found at Annex B to this chapter.

PROTECT 1-23
PROTECT

ITEM ACTION REMARKS


(a) (b) (c)
7 INFORM OTHER The Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) and the Land
AGENCIES Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) are to be
informed by the fastest possible means. For all Land
Command units this is to follow the format of LANDSO 3202.
It would be normal practice for other units and Services to use
LANDSO 3202. Special Investigation Branch (SIB) RMP may
also need to be informed. (See paragraphs 01116 - 01120)
8 WEAPONS DETAILS The serial number of the weapon involved is to be recorded.
(PRESERVATION OF Damaged or defective weapons, lodged bullets and empty
EVIDENCE) cases are to be left where they fell after the incident/acci-
dent. An armourer should be requested to attend.
9 CORDON Cordon off the area of the accident to prevent any evidence
(PRESERVATION OF being destroyed or moved. Everything should remain as it is
EVIDENCE) in situ until the arrival of the investigative authorities. All per-
sonnel involved in the exercise are to mark their position on
the ground using an appropriate marker, eg webbing. Make
a sketch map or plan to hand to the ATO or SASC represen-
tative to record the distance and position in relation to the
accident of:
a. All fragments.
b. All personnel involved and witnesses recording direction
they were facing, their posture (standing, kneeling etc) at
the time of the accident and, if applicable, the state of
readiness of their weapons and the direction the weapon
was pointing.
c. Position of injured personnel involved as in sub-
paragraph b.
10 WITNESSES The names of all witnesses of the accident are to be record-
ed. To prevent personnel changing their minds on events,
discussion about the accident is to be discouraged. If possi-
ble witnesses should be separated. Witnesses should pro-
duce a brief written account of the accident.
11 AMMUNITION The ADAC, designation and BKI of the ammunition involved in
(CLEARANCE OF the accident/incident are to be recorded. The ammunition is
EVIDENCE) to be segregated and not used again unless authorised by the
ATO. Once all investigating agencies have been consulted
the ATO will authorise clearance of the scene.
12 SUSPENSION OF All Range Staff involved in the accident/incident are suspend-
RANGE STAFF ed pending a preliminary investigation by an Officer appointed
by the Exercise Director. (See para 01110)
13 COMPLETION OF It is the responsibility of the SRCO/RCO/ECO to ensure
MOD FORM 906/906A that the details of the accident/incident are entered in the
– LAND RANGE LOG Land Range Log.

Note: In the case of a Negligent Discharge follow the procedure laid down in para-
graphs 01112 and 01113.

1-24 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

01100. IF THE SRCO/RCO OR ECO IS IN ANY DOUBT AS TO WHETHER AN


INCIDENT OR ACCIDENT HAS OCCURED HE SHOULD REPORT IT AS AN
ACCIDENT.

01101. Recommencing Firing. Firing may continue following an ammunition


incident if:

a. It is a blind or misfire which is destroyed in accordance with the procedure


laid down in Section 3 of this Chapter.

b. The same type of failure were to recur it would not put personnel at risk.

c. The scene of the incident or any evidence remains undisturbed for the
arrival of ATO/SASC.

d. The incident will not affect the training being carried out.

e. A different batch of ammunition is used. If any doubt exists cease firing.

01102. Misfires. Misfires, although reported as ammunition incidents, (an exam-


ple of the format for reporting can be seen at Annex C to this chapter.) may be due
to the weapon and not the ammunition. The unit, in addition to notifying the ATO and
HQ SASC, is to arrange with an armourer for the weapon to be inspected and the
ATO furnished with a copy of the armourer’s report.

01103. Disposal of Misfired Ammunition. Misfired ammunition is to be dis-


posed of in accordance with the ATO instructions. However, if the ATO is not avail-
able small arms ammunition is to be returned to store, segregated and is to await
ATO’s disposal. Other stocks, depending on the type of primer initiation, will be dis-
posed of as follows:

a. Percussion Initiated Ammunition. Once struck and failing to fire these


may be sensitive to shock and may cause accidents during normal handling.
They are to be destroyed as misfires by ATO

b. Electrically Initiated Ammunition. These are not sensitive to shock in the


same way as percussion initiated ammunition but, susceptible to Radio
Frequency (RF) impulses. They are to be placed in the approved closed metal
Service container and segregated from other serviceable ammunition to await
disposal instructions from the ATO.

01104. Blinds. Blinds are to be reported as ammunition incidents. An example of


the format for reporting can be seen at Annex C to this chapter. The procedure for
destruction of blinds is laid down in detail in Section 3 of this Chapter. CFAVs are
not allowed to destroy blinds.

PROTECT 1-25
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Ammunition/Weapon Defect Reporting

01105. The defect procedures outlined below apply only in the following circum-
stances:
a. Ammunition. Prior to it being fired or thrown or projected. This will nor-
mally occur whilst unpacking ammunition immediately prior to use.
b. Weapons. Where no accident has occurred.

01106. Examples of ammunition/weapon defects are:


a. The percussion cap is found to be missing from a round when it is
removed from its packaging.
b. The quantity and type of rounds inside a sealed box are different to the
markings on the container.
c. Broken firing pins, extractors.

Immediate Action to be Taken Following an Ammunition Defect

01107. If any defect is detected it is the responsibility of the SRCO/RCO or ECO to


ensure that the following actions are taken:
ITEM ACTION REMARKS
(a) (b) (c)
1 INFORM ATO ATO is to be contacted.
2 AMMUNITION The ADAC, designation and BKI of the ammunition involved
in the incident are to be recorded. The ammunition is to be
segregated and not used again unless authorised by the ATO.
3 CONTAINER The container and all packing fitments are to be retained for
the ATO. All seals and labels are to be retained.

Immediate Action to be Taken Following a Weapon Defect


01108. If any defect is detected it is the responsibility of the SRCO/RCO or ECO
to ensure that the following action is taken:
a. After any stoppage drills have been carried out and if possible the cause
ascertained, remove the weapon from use after carrying out any safety pre-
cautions.
b. If training can continue with other weapons segregate the weapon. If not
the armourer must be contacted to arrange repair.

1-26 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

c. On return to base the defect is to be reported using AFG 8267A —


Equipment Failure Report (EFR). Detailed instructions for the completion of
EFRs are contained in Material Regulations for the Army, Volume 2, Pamphlet
No. 2, Section 1.

Ammunition Accident/Incident Reporting Agencies

01109. In the event of an ammunition accident or incident the following agencies


are to be informed as applicable:

a. In UK (including NI). Immediately inform the following who will give


advice on what further action is to be taken:

(1) The Joint Service EOD Operations Centre (JSEODOC) via the
Ammunition Incidents Hotline Didcot Military Ext (94234) 3360/3361/3362
Didcot Civil (01235) Ext 513360/513361/513362. Fax Mil (94234) 3354
(Fax Civil 01235 513354) Signal Address JSEODOPSCEN Didcot.

(2) HQ SASC, Warminster Military (94381) Ext 2366/2612 Warminster


Civil (01985) Ext 222366/222612.

(3) Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) Netheravon Military (94321) Ext
8458, Netheravon Civil (01980) 628458.

(4) Serious Equipment Failure Investigation Team (SEFIT) Andover


Military (93556) Ext 7940, Civil (01225) 467940.

(5) Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) Netheravon


Military (94321) ext 8593, Netheravon Military Civilian (+441980) 628593.

b. In Germany. Immediately inform the following who will give advice on


what further action is to be taken:

(1) 921 Sqn, 11 EOD Regt RLC Duty Officer, Mobile Telephone Number
0172 212 8693.

(2) HQ SASC, Warminster Military (94381) Ext. 2366/2612, Warminster


Civilian (+441985) ext 222366/222612.

(3) Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) Netheravon Military (94321) Ext
8458, Netheravon Civil (+441980) 628458.

(4) Serious Equipment Failure Investigation Team (SEFIT) Andover


Military (93556) Ext 7940, Civil (01225) 467940.

(5) Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) Netheravon


Military (94321) ext 8593, Netheravon Military Civilian (+441980) 628593.

PROTECT 1-27
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

c. In Cyprus. Immediately inform the following who will give advice on what
further action is to be taken:

(1) The local ATO.

(2) HQ SASC, Warminster Military (94381) ext. 2366/2612, Warminster


Civilian (+441985) ext 222366/222612.

(3) SO3 Ranges SASC, J3 Ops/Trg, HQ British Forces Cyprus, BFPO


53, Tel (94120) Ext 3957.

(4) Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) Netheravon Military (94321) Ext
8458, Netheravon Civil (+441980) 628458.

(5) Serious Equipment Failure Investigation Team (SEFIT) Andover


Military (93556) Ext 7940, Civil (01225) 467940.

(6) Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) Netheravon


Military (94321) ext 8593, Netheravon Military Civilian (+441980) 628593.

d. In Falkland Islands. Immediately inform the following who will give advice
on what further action is to be taken:

(1) HQ SASC, Warminster Military 94381 Ext 2366/2612, Warminster


Civil (+441985) Ext 222366/222612.

(2) SATO, Falkland Islands.

(3) Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) Netheravon Military (94321) Ext
8458, Netheravon Civil (+441980) 628458.

(4) Serious Equipment Failure Investigation Team (SEFIT) Andover


Military (93556) Ext 7940, Civil (01225) 467940.

e. Rest of the World. Immediately inform the following who will give advice
on what further action is to be taken:

(1) The Joint Service EOD Operations Centre (JSEODOC) via the
Ammunition Incidents Hotline Didcot Military Ext (94234) 3360/3361/3362
Didcot Civil (+441235) Ext 513360/513362.

(2) HQ SASC, Warminster Military (94381) Ext 2366/2612 Warminster


Civil (+441985) Ext 222366/222612.

(3) Army Incident Notification Cell (AINC) Netheravon Military (94321) Ext
8458, Netheravon Civil (+441980) 628458.

(4) Serious Equipment Failure Investigation Team (SEFIT) Andover


Military (93556) Ext 7940, Civil (01225) 467940.

1-28 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

(5) Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) Netheravon


Military (94321) ext 8593, Netheravon Military Civilian (+441980) 628593.

Note:
1. When carrying out firing in locations without ATO support, consultation
with an ATO prior to departure is advised.
2. Notification of the relevant authorities, using LANDSO 3202 as a guide,
should be carried out using any available channels, eg signal via local
British Consulate.

f. The format for reporting incidents is contained in LANDSO 3202. Units are
to ensure they have a copy of this document ready to hand during training.

g. Refer press and media enquiries to the Public Information staff.

Temporary Suspension of Range Staff

01110. As a result of any ammunition accident the following is to take place:

a. Those safety staff directly involved in the accident will immediately have
their range qualifications temporarily suspended.

b. The Exercise Director will appoint a suitably qualified officer who has not
had direct involvement in that particular range activity to conduct a preliminary
investigation of the safety staff.

c. Once the preliminary investigation has been completed the Exercise


Director is to be made aware of its finding and must decide upon the appropriate
course of action to be taken:

(1) Where he is satisfied that members of the safety staff did not
contribute towards the accident he may reinstate them and allow them to
continue in their appointments.

(2) Where there is any doubt the temporary suspension is to remain in


force until such time as a formal investigation by LAIT or HQ SASC has
been completed or when it becomes clear during this formal investigation
that temporary suspension would no longer be appropriate.

01111. Where it is apparent that re-training is required with Inf WS/Cadet WS or


Inf Range Qualification, then the following action is to be taken:

a. The suspension must remain in place.

b. A programme of instruction is to be prepared by a member of the SASC and


endorsed by HQ SASC.

PROTECT 1-29
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

c. A period of instruction, delivered by a member of the SASC is to be


undertaken.
d. Once the instruction is complete a letter from HQ SASC to the CO will
recommend if the suspension should be lifted.

Negligent Discharges with Infantry and Cadet Weapon Systems


01112. If a negligent discharge results in injury or damage, the ammunition accident
procedure is to be used.
01113. Where a negligent discharge occurs when using live or blank ammunition and
there is no injury or damage, the following procedure is to be taken:
a. The firer is to be ordered to apply the safety catch and lay the weapon down.
b. A member of the Safety Staff is to take control and unload the weapon.
c. Inspect the weapon to ensure that it is clear and empty the magazine. No
attempt is to be made to strip or clean the weapon or magazine.
d. Record the serial number of the weapon and the detail of orders given and the
actions taken by the individual.
e. The weapon and magazine are to be inspected by a qualified armourer. The
weapon is not to be fired or the magazine used until they have been certified as
serviceable.
f. The SRCO/RCO/ECO will report a negligent discharge to his unit, so that a
decision can be made on whether or not disciplinary action is to be taken. He is
also responsible for ensuring that a Negligent Discharge Report Form 1664
contained in JSP 482 Vol 2 Chapter B (see Annex D to this chapter) is completed
by the unit and forwarded to the local ATO and who will then forward them to the
Munitions Incident Database (MID) Cell for collation. A copy of the Negligent
Discharge Report Form 1664 can be found on page 1D-1.
01114. Error of Drill Automatic Weapons. Once given an executive order to fire, it
is the responsibility of the cadet to ensure that the correct type of fire ordered is used. If a
cadet or CFAV fires on automatic when ordered to fire single shots, the offence is to be
treated as an error of drill. The RCO/ECO is to investigate the incident to establish
whether the cadet has been negligent in his actions and where necessary disciplinary
action should be taken. If however, a cadet or CFAV fires without being ordered to do so
then this is to be treated under the negligent discharge procedure.
01115. Remedial Training. Any cadet or CFAV who negligently discharges a
weapon through an error of drill is to receive remedial weapon handling training at the
earliest opportunity. A negligent discharge will render any previous Weapon Handling
Test (WHT) result as void. The cadet or CFAV is not allowed to be issued live or blank

1-30 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

ammunition again until they have been successfully retested by an appropriately


qualified SAA instructor (The result of the retest is to be recorded on JPA
/WESTMINSTER/ BADER or P File).

Investigation of Accidents

01116. The Land Accident Prevention and Investigation Team (LAIT) conducts
independent investigations into serious or fatal training accidents and may also carry
out any other investigations into any training incident or less serious accident, as
directed by Chief (CH) LAIT, when requested by the chain of command.

01117. Notwithstanding paragraph 01116 DInf has mandated that SASC Officers
and, in exceptional circumstances, SASC Warrant Officer, as directed by HQ SASC are
to investigate all accidents and incidents involving Inf and Cadet WS and pyrotechnics.

01118. The Inspector Explosives (Army) IE(A) (PATO LAND) is responsible for
ensuring that all LAND ammunition incidents are promptly reported and properly
investigated. PATO has empowered suitably qualified Ammunition Technical Officers
(ATOs) and Ammunition Technicians (ATs) to carry out the Inspectorate task of
ammunition accident and incident investigation. An ATO/AT will attend all accidents
and most incidents.

01119. Prompt and detailed investigations of all the circumstances surrounding an


accident or incident are essential and it is the duty of every person who has
knowledge of the accident or incident to cooperate fully with the investigation team.
These measures provide the best means of establishing the cause of an accident or
incident and may prevent a recurrence. An investigation by the civil police or the SIB
may be necessary in the case of death or serious injury.

01120. The weapon, together with any ammunition fragments, is to be disposed of


in accordance with instructions issued by the ATO/Armourer/SASC representative in
conjunction with the civil police or SIB when they have been involved.

Incident Reports — Accidents/Incidents and Matters of Public Interest

01121. Accidents or incidents may arouse public interest or criticism about which
Ministers and senior officers must be informed, therefore they are to be reported
without delay. An incident which has a criminal, disciplinary or security aspect and
any accident/incident involving ammunition or weapons often leads to rapid and
intensive media enquiries. It is most important that accurate information on all such
incidents is reported as quickly as possible.

01122. The incident report (INCREP) required is in addition to any action which may
be necessary to comply with Casualty Procedure (JSP 751 - Joint Casualty and
Compassionate Policy and Procedures, Issue 3, 1 Apr 06). A copy of the INCREP is to
be forwarded to the appropriate PT.

PROTECT 1-31
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

01123. For all units within Land Command, Land Command Standing Order
(LANDSO) No. 3202 is to be complied with. Other units and Services should seek
advice as to what action is to be taken from the geographical headquarters, Range
Control or British Army Training Unit in whose area the accident/incident takes place.
It will often be the case that they will be invited to complete the relevant Land
Command Standing Order No. 3202 INCREP since it has a wide distribution and, if
not already tasked, will trigger consequential action from other key agencies.

1-32 PROTECT
Example of a medical risk assessment for live firing on an LFMT range where medical support is available and
located close to the range.

MEDICAL RISK ASSESSMENT FOR 25 M BARRACK RANGE — OLD PARK BARRACKS


Relevant Publications/Pamphlets/Procedures: A. Cadet Manual. Planning Officer: Maj M Wilson
B. Relevant Weapon GSPs. Date Assessment: 12 Jul 01
C. Pamphlet No. 21C.
D. JSP 403 Vol 2.
E. Range Order – 25 m Bk Range, Old Park Bks.

Likelihood of
The Residual
The Hazard Injury
Location and Risks Medical Cover
Ser (Hazard Existing Controls (with control Remarks
Activity (Likelihood & Required
Survey) measures in
Severity)
place)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
1 Old Park Bks 1. Injury by 1. All firers WHT Most Unlikely Unspecified 1. Medical person nomi-
25 m Bk Gun Shot assessed as safe IAW minor injuries. nated.
Range – Rifle Wound. Ref A & B. (Unlikely and 2. First Aid Kit (10 per-
Live Firing 2. Falling into 2. All supervisors quali- trivial) son) on range.
Fire Trench. fied current and compe-

PROTECT
PROTECT

tent IAW Ref C.


3. Supervisors and firers
briefed.
4. Range designed IAW
Ref D.
5. Range conducted IAW
Ref C & E.
6. Unit medical centre
400 m away.
7. MO/RMA in station
during firing.
8. Telephone comms on
range.
9. Medical centre veh on
call.
CHAPTER 1
ANNEX A TO

1A-1
Example of a medical risk assessment for live firing on an LFMT range where, due to the remoteness of the loca-

1A-2
tion, more than the basic level of medical cover is required.

MEDICAL RISK ASSESSMENT FOR SEDGEMOOR ETR


Relevant Publications/Pamphlets/Procedures: A. Cadet Manual. Planning Officer: Maj M Wilson
B. Relevant Weapon GSPs. Date Assessment: 12 Jul 01
C. Pamphlet No. 21C.
D. JSP 403 Vol 2.
E. Range Order – Sedgemoor ETR.

Likelihood of
The Residual
The Hazard Injury
Location and Risks Medical Cover
Ser (Hazard Existing Controls (with control Remarks
Activity (Likelihood & Required
Survey) measures in
Severity)
place)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)
1 Sedgemoor 1. Injury by 1. All firers WHT Most Unlikely Unspecified 1. Medical person nomi-
ETR – Live Gun Shot assessed as safe IAW minor injuries. nated.
Firing with Wound. Ref A & B. (Unlikely and 2. First Aid Kit (10 per-
relevant 2. Falling into 2. All supervisors quali- trivial) son) on range.
3. Stretcher on the range.

PROTECT
weapons Fire Trench. fied current and compe-
PROTECT

tent IAW Ref C. 4. Veh for minor casual-


3. Supervisors and firers ties.
briefed. 5. Due to remoteness of
4. Range designed IAW range in event of serious
Ref D. accident civilian medical
5. Range conducted IAW services will be used.
Ref C & E. 6. Civil ambulance con-
6. Telephone on range. tacted by phoning 2222.
7. Place a guide at the
range entrance on A475.
8. Nearest A & E at
Penny-Packet, 27 miles
away.
9. Route to A & E is A475
north for 14 miles, left at
A221 for 12 miles, right at
A96 for 1 mile.
PROTECT

ANNEX B TO
CHAPTER 1

AMMUNITION ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORT

1. Name and rank of person reporting the accident/incident:

2. Unit:

2.1 Unit involved in the accident/incident:

2.2 Unit address and telephone number:

3. Incident:

3.1 DTG of accident/incident:

3.2 Location of accident/incident:

3.3 Point of contact (if different from above):

3.4 Ammunition (Type, ADAC and BKI where known):

3.5 Fatalities and/or injuries (if applicable):

3.6 Weapon type and damage (if applicable):

4. Action taken by unit so far:

5. Has SIB, LAIT or REME Armourer been tasked?:

Note: This format is to be used to report all ammunition accidents/incidents to the


relevant ATO contact point.

PROTECT 1B-1
PROTECT

1B-2 PROTECT
PROTECT

ANNEX C TO
CHAPTER 1

BLIND OR MISFIRE REPORT

Reporting Unit Details

1. ATO or AT Ref No. 2. DLSA Ref No.


3. Unit Involved.
4. Date Time Group 5. Place of Incident.
(DTG) of the Incident.
Ammunition Details
6. ADAC. 7. BKI.
8. NATO Stock No.
9. Designation.
10. Qty Issued. 11. Qty Fired.
12. Qty Failed. 13. Qty Remaining.
Weapon Details
14. Type. 15. Ser No.
Vehicle Details (If applicable)
16. Type. 17. Reg No.
Incident Details (* Delete where applicable)
18. Occurred 18.1 Basic Training/Continuation Training/Advanced Training/
During: Operations/Trial/Demonstration/Guard Duties/Movement/Other
(Specify)*
18.2 Range/Exercise/Barracks/Transit/Depot/Other (Specify)*
19. Conditions: 19.1 Weather: Wet/Dry/Rain/Snow/Hail/Ice/Other (Specify)*
19.2 Ground Type: Grass/Mud/Sand/Stony/Tarmac/Concrete/Forest/
Water/Scrubland/Other (Specify)*
19.3 Climatic Zone: See LUMAT
19.4 Temperature: Below –40/Between –40 and –10/Between
–10 and +10/Between +10 and +40/Above +40
19.5 Wind Speed: Beaufort Scale and Wind Speed Estimation
(see A&ER Vol 3 Pam 21 Part 13 Sect 8 para 29).
Reporting Unit Remarks
20.

PROTECT 1C-1
PROTECT

Reporting Officer Details

21. Rank. 22. Name (Blocks).


23. Date.
24. Signature. 25. Unit Stamp.

Investigating ATO or AT Remarks

26.

Investigating ATO or AT Details


27. No. 28. Rank. 29. Name (Blocks).

30. Date. 31. Signature.

SATO Details
32. Rank. 33. Name (Blocks).
34. Date.
35. Signature. 36. Unit Stamp.

1C-2 PROTECT
PROTECT

ANNEX D TO
CHAPTER 1

NEGLIGENT DISCHARGE REPORT

Reporting Unit Details

1. ATO or AT Ref No. 2. DLSA Ref No.


3. Unit Involved.
4. Date Time Group 5. Place of Incident.
(DTG) of the Incident.
Ammunition Details
6. ADAC. 7. BKI.
8. NATO Stock No.
9. Designation.
Weapon Details
10. Type. 11. Ser No.
Incident Details (* Delete where applicable)
12. Training Standards: Regular (Trained)/Regular (Recruit)/Reservist (Trained)/
Reservist (Recruit)/Cadet/Civilian/Other (Specify)*
13. Occurred During: 13.1 Basic Training/Continuation Training/Advanced
Training/Operations/Trial/Demonstration/Guard
Duties/Movement/Other (Specify)*
13.2 Range/Exercise/Barracks/Transit/Depot/Other
(Specify)*
14. Drill: Load/Unload/Ready/Make Safe/Stoppage/Misfire/Other
(Specify)*
15. Conditions: 15.1 Weather: Wet/Dry/Rain/Snow/Hail/Ice/Other
(Specify)*
15.2 Light: Day (Bright)/Day (Overcast)/Night
(No light)/Night (Moonlight)/Dusk/
Dawn/Artificial/Other (Specify)*
Reporting Unit Remarks
16.

PROTECT 1D-1
PROTECT

Reporting Officer Details

17. Rank. 18. Name (Blocks).


19. Date.
20. Signature. 21. Unit Stamp.

Investigating ATO or AT Remarks

22.

Investigating ATO or AT Details


23. No. 24. Rank. 25. Name (Blocks).

26. Date. 27. Signature.

SATO Details
28. Rank. 29. Name (Blocks).
30. Date.
31. Signature. 32. Unit Stamp.

1D-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Chapter 2

QUALIFICATIONS
CONTENTS

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION 2-1

SECTION 2. GENERAL 2-2

SECTION 3. QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES FOR REGULAR


AND RESERVE FORCES (ARMY), SMALL ARMS 2-8

SECTION 4. QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES,


FOR THE CADET FORCES 2-19

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION

Purpose CONTENTS

PURPOSE 2-1
0201. This Chapter explains the qualifica-
tion process for all forms of live and blank REFERENCING 2-1
firing training with Inf and Cadet WS.
RANK AND APPOINTMENTS 2-1

0202. It defines the responsibilities of


Commanding Officers when conducting live or blank firing with Inf and Cadet WS.

Referencing

0203. The sections in this chapter refer to centrally run courses at nominated
training establishments. Each course is supported by a Course Folder which includes
an Assessment Specification (ASpec). Personnel who require details of course
content, standards or testing criterion should refer to the Course Folder.

0204. Chapter 1 of this pamphlet is to be read and understood before referencing


this chapter.

Ranks and Appointments

0205. Throughout this chapter ranks are referred to by their collective title and not
by the title associated to a particular Arm or cap badge. Therefore, when, for example,
the rank is Cpl it also implies, LSgt, Bdr or LCofH.

0206 – 0210. Reserved.

PROTECT 2-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 2. — GENERAL
CONTENTS

DEFINITIONS 2-2
Definitions
QUALIFICATION 2-2
0211. The following definitions should be SMALL ARMS SCHOOL CORPS
understood before reading this chapter: INSTRUCTORS 2-6

a. Plan (Planning). This is the CADET FORCE RANGE QUALIFICATION2-6

detailed organisation of a live or blank firing exercise or practice which must


include:

(1) Reconnaissance of the area to be used.

(2) Safe siting of targets, live enemy, weapons and fire positions.

(3) Written instructions.

b. Conduct (Conducting). This describes the running of a live or blank firing


exercise or practice within the approved plan. The SRCO/RCO/ECO may or
may not have planned the exercise or practice. Live firing on permanent ranges
where arcs of fire, target positions, weapon locations and firing positions are
fixed by local Range Orders is deemed to be conducting and in this sense does
not require for each firing practice to be planned. However, in these circum-
stances the RCO will still be required to conduct a reconnaissance and to pro-
duce a coordinating instruction or RASP as outlined in Section 1 to Chapter 4.

c. Supervise (Safety Supervisor). This is the generic title given to an offi-


cer, warrant officer, NCO or CFAV responsible for the safe conduct of a spe-
cific group or individual, within the overall plan of an exercise or practice, involv-
ing live ammunition.

Qualification

0212. Award of Range Qualification. The Director of Infantry is the awarding


body for all Inf and Cadet WS range qualifications. The awarding of such qualifica-
tions has been delegated to the officers of the SASC. To be qualified to plan, conduct
or supervise live firing an officer, warrant officer, NCO or CFAV must have success-
fully completed one of the qualifying courses listed in the sections of this chapter.
Such courses as may be attended by an individual are to be regulated by an SASC
officer who represents the qualifying authority, on behalf of the Director of Infantry. All
instruction must be given by SASC personnel or Infantry, Other Arms, Royal Marine,
RAF Regt or foreign exchange officers, WOs or NCOs employed alongside SASC
instructors. The range qualification categories are to be shown on individual course

2-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

reports and are additional to any specialist qualification awarded for successful com-
pletion of the course as a whole.

0213. Training Limitations. The limited time and resources on such courses
may prevent the inclusion of specific instruction on the conduct of live or blank firing
of every Inf or Cadet WS or on every type of range that may be encountered by stu-
dents in their subsequent service. The instruction given on the course however,
forms the basis, which combined with the integrity and responsibility associated with
commissioned, warrant and non-commissioned rank, is sufficient that students
should be able to, by reference to relevant pamphlets or specifically trained person-
nel, plan, conduct or supervise live or blank firing of those weapons or ranges cov-
ered by that qualification to the required standards of safety.
0214. Minimum Rank Requirement. The tables in the following sections specif-
ically lay down the minimum rank required for planning, conducting and supervising
live or blank firing. Regardless of rank whilst attending a course, course qualified indi-
viduals are not empowered to exercise the responsibilities accorded by the qualify-
ing courses until they have attained the minimum substantive or acting (not local)
rank laid down in these sections thereby ensuring those conducting such training are
not only qualified but also equipped with the appropriate level of experience and
authority.
0215. Progression on Range Qualifications. As an Officer, Warrant Officer, NCO
or CFAV gains in rank and experience, the career courses they are then eligible to
attend provide additional range qualifications and an opportunity for existing qualifica-
tions to be updated.
0216. The Responsibilities of a Commanding Officer (CO). A CO is to review
annually the competence of all range qualified individuals under command, taking
into consideration that the success and safety of live or blank firing are directly influ-
enced by the ability of the officer, warrant officer, NCO or CFAV in man-manage-
ment, military experience and administration as well as his competence to conduct
live firing. The CO is empowered to cancel any qualification if he considers that an
individual’s competence and/or experience do not warrant its retention.
0217. Range Qualifications on Termination of Service. On leaving the
Regular, Reserve Forces or Cadet Forces all Inf and Cadet WS Range Qualifications
are cancelled. Personnel employed in MSF or Retired Officer appointments cannot
hold an Inf or Cadet WS Range Qualification.
0218. Retention of Range Qualifications. Notwithstanding paragraph 0217
above there are certain circumstances where an individual who has previously served
in the Regular or Reserve Forces and obtained a range qualification can exercise that
range qualification after termination of service. This is providing that no longer than 2
years has elapsed between their termination of service with the Regular or Reserve
Forces and their commencement of service with the following organisation only:
Cadet Forces — From Regular or Reserve Forces

PROTECT 2-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0219. The minimum rank requirement to hold a range qualification will apply to the
above organisations. It is the responsibility of the CO (or equivalent) to assess the suit-
ability of an individual to retain a range qualification. Equally, should an individual take
a break in Service but returns within 2 years, his CO may reinstate his range qualifica-
tion.
0220. Cancellation of Range Qualification. Any cancellation of an individual’s
range qualification is to be the subject of a Part 2 Order action by the unit. An indi-
vidual cannot regain his qualification until he has successfully requalified on the rel-
evant course as listed in this Chapter.

Authorisation
0221. General. Where cadet units have insufficient qualified personnel to match
their training needs Cadet Training Teams (CTT) are permitted to authorise unquali-
fied personnel to conduct Ancillary Range Duties (ARD) during LFMT as follows:
a. Butts IC.

b. Console Operator.

c. Firing Point Safety Supervisor (LFMT ONLY).

0222. Such authorisation is to be the result of a period of training using the Course
Folder issued by CTC Frimley. Individuals are to have sufficient instruction and have
been formally trained and tested so as to ensure that they are able to undertake their
duties completely and in strict accordance with the appropriate regulations given in
this pamphlet.
0223. Ancillary Range Duties. During the training of Ancillary Range Duties, for
LFMT, there is a requirement for a qualified CTT instructor to monitor the students.
The following rules are to apply during this training:
a. The qualified CTT instructor may only monitor one student at a time.

b. The student is to properly instructed in the procedures and responsibilities


of Ancillary Range Duties before being tested.

c. When the student assumes the responsibilities of ARD, the qualified CTT
instructor is to remain in position which allows him to intervene should safety
be compromised.

d. Where CTT’s conduct LFMT authorisation training for ARD, LFMT is to be


planned and conducted for the sole purpose of testing the students in the appli-
cation of their responsibilities and duties. Testing is NOT to be carried out dur-
ing LFMT that has been planned for any other purpose.

0224. Conditions. Individuals cannot be authorised to plan and conduct any live

2-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

or blank firing activities. Authorisation to conduct ARD is subject to the following con-
ditions:
a. Authorisation should be considered as the exception rather than the rule
and every effort should be made to send the CFAV on a qualifying course as
soon as possible.

b. CO’s may not authorise individuals to supervise any form of live firing that
they could not have been course qualified to supervise due to insufficient rank
(see Qualification Categories in Section 4 of this chapter).

c. A CFAV who is not course qualified maybe authorised by his CO through


a CTT to conduct Ancillary Range Duties.

d. The CO will be required to show on the Range Authorisation Certificate


(see fig 2-1 – Range Authorisation Certificate) exactly what the individual is
authorised to do:

(1) Act as IC Butts.

(2) Act as IC Console.


(3) Act as Firing Point Safety Supervisor (LFMT ONLY).
0225. Procedures. The procedures for authorisation are as follows:
a. The OC CTT is to ensure that the ARD course is conducted as laid down
in the Course Folder provided by CTC Frimley. All candidates are to be made
fully conversant with the relevant chapters and sections of this pamphlet relat-
ing to the role and responsibilities of the ARD authorisation.

b. A training programme is to be produced using the Course Folder from CTC


Frimley. This programme and the TO’s are to be archived in order to maintain
an audit trail. Provisions must be made for the practical aspects of the individ-
ual tasks to be taught and performance to be assessed. All instruction must be
given by qualified CTT personnel. For example; training of a CFAV to conduct
ARD will be best achieved by placing them ‘under instruction’ in their role dur-
ing LFMT under supervision of a range qualified CTT instructor. However,
trainee ARD’s are NOT to be employed in those specific appointments until the
authorisation process is complete.

c. Once the OC CTT is satisfied that the training specified above has been
achieved, he will ensure that the CO personally signs the Range Authorisation
Certificate. The certificate (see Fig 2-1) is to be held with the individual CFAV’s
personal documents. The details of the successful completion of the ARD
course and the CO’s authorisation are to be notified in the cadet unit’s orders.
Cadet units are to maintain a register of ARD authorised personnel to show
dates awarded and extent of the authorisation.

PROTECT 2-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. On assumption of command a CO is to review all authorisations to confirm


that they are current and that they are still necessary. The Range Authorisation
Certificate is to be re-signed by the incoming CO.

e. The CO is to review all authorisations annually.

f. The CO may cancel an authorisation if he considers that the individual has


not been able to maintain a satisfactory standard of competence.

g. Recognising that the most common form of authorisation is for ARD dur-
ing LFMT CTC Frimley has endorsed a Course Folder covering the necessary
training required to authorise personnel to act as ARD range staff. The Course
Folder is available through CTC Frimley.

Small Arms School Corps Instructors

0226. If a member of the SASC receives instruction at the Support Weapons


School Warminster, Infantry Battle School, AFV Gunnery School Lulworth, SASC
TAG (UK), SASC TAG (Germany) or HQ SASC and meets the required standard, he
will be awarded the appropriate range qualifications by the relevant
Commander/Chief Instructor. A certificate, signed by the respective Commander, is
to be retained with the individual’s documents and the relevant information promul-
gated in Part 2 Orders.

0227. Range qualifications may also be awarded at the discretion of Commanders


of Support Weapons School Warminster, Inf Battle Sch or AFV Gunnery School
Lulworth to Infantry, Other Arms, Royal Marine, RAF Regt or foreign exchange offi-
cers, WOs or NCOs employed alongside, or in place of SASC instructors.

0228. Cadet Force Range Qualification. The Director of Infantry is the awarding
body for all cadet range conduct qualification courses. The qualifying courses for all
Cadet Forces are listed at Section 4 to this chapter.

2-6 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

RANGE AUTHORISATION CERTIFICATE

1. I certify that No ……………………………………… Rank ………………………

Name …………………………………………………….. Unit ………………………..

Has been trained in accordance with Infantry Training Volume IV, Pamphlet No
21-C, Regulations for Cadets Training with Cadet and Infantry Weapon Systems
and Pyrotechnics and the ARD Course Training Folder.

2. This training was conducted by a qualified instructor from ……………... Cadet


Training Team

Number …………………….. Rank ………….. Name …………………………..…

Range Qualification held ……………………………………

3. I consider the CFAV named at serial 1 competent and I authorise him/her to


conduct the following ARD duties:

a. Act as IC Butts*.

b. Act as IC Console*.

c. Act as Firing Point Safety Supervisor (LFMT ONLY)*.

* Delete if not applicable.

Date ……………………….. Signed …………………………………..


Rank …………………………………….
Name ……………………………………
Appointment ……………………………
(To be signed personally by the Commanding Officer)
Note:

A. The above information is to be recorded on WESTMINSTER/BADER and in


the CFAV personal file and is ONLY valid for one year.

B. Authorisation should be considered as the exception rather than the rule and
every effort should be made to send the CFAV on a qualifying course as soon as
possible.

C. The certificate can be signed by an officer who has been delegated the pow-
ers of Commanding Officer, however, in such cases the Commanding Officer is to
review the Authorisation Certificate on resuming command.

Fig 2-1. — Range Authorisation Certificate

PROTECT 2-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0229. – 0235. Reserved.


SECTION 3. — QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION
CATEGORIES FOR REGULAR AND RESERVE FORCES (ARMY),
SMALL ARMS CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 2-8

Introduction AUTHORITIES 2-8

0236. The tables in this section show the QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES 2-9
range qualification categories that can be
obtained on current and past qualifying courses.

Authorities

0237. Listed below are the only qualifying authorities and/or locations in respect of
the current courses set out in the tables shown in this section:

a. Regular Forces.

Serial 1a. Infantry Battle School


1b. Infantry Battle School
1c. Infantry Battle School
HQ SASC
SASC Training Advisory Groups

Serial 2. HQ SASC
SASC Training Advisory Groups
SO3 Ranges HQ BF Cyprus

Serial 3. Infantry Battle School

Serial 4. SASC Training Advisory Groups


HQ SASC
Serial 5. Royal Military Academy Sandhurst (RMAS)

Serial 6. HQ SASC
SASC Training Advisory Groups
Distributed Training Cell

b. Reserve Forces.

Serial 7. SASC Training Advisory Groups

Serial 8 HQ SASC
SASC (V)

Serial 9. Infantry Battle School

2-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

HQ SASC
0238. A SASC Officer and Warrant Officer is held on the unit establishment to
enable Inf WS Range Qualifications to be awarded on behalf of the Director of
Infantry.

Qualification Categories

0239. Any officer, warrant officer NCO or CFAV who successfully completes a
small arms course will be awarded the range qualification categories appropriate to
that course.

0240. Qualification to plan, conduct or supervise live or blank firing on small arms
ranges may be gained in the categories referred to in the tables in later paragraphs.

0241. Course reports include a section on range qualification using the key below.
Such course reports take precedence over this section as the authoritative docu-
ment for an individual’s range qualification. Exceptions may be annotated in the
report where critical TOs have not been achieved or covered due to performance or
non availability of resources.

0242. The qualification categories are as follows:

a. SA (A) (90). Plan, conduct and supervise all live or blank firing
with Infantry Weapon Systems including:

(1) Battle Inoculation.

(2) Vehicle mounted small arms, pintle mounted


and shoulder controlled (see Note).

(3) The destruction of blinds and misfires.

(4) Single and multiple firing of M18A1 Claymore.

b. SA (B) (90). Plan, conduct and supervise LFMT and TLFTT on


NDA, LDA and FDA purpose built ranges, including
the following:

(1) Air Rifle Range.

(2) Indoor Range.

(3) Training Theatre.

(4) Tube Range.

(5) Mobile Portable Range.

(6) 25 Metre Range.

PROTECT 2-9
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(7) Barrack Range.

(8) German A, B, C and D Type Ranges.

(9) Gallery Range (GR)/Converted Gallery Range


(CGR), including console and butts.

(10) Electric Target Range (ETR), including


console.

(11) Mechanised Moving Target Trainer Range


(MMTTR), including butts.

(12) Purpose built ranges where static firing of


Pintle Mounted Machine Guns is permitted.

(13) DCCT Range.

c. SA (C) (90). Conduct and supervise TLFTT and LFTT exercises


on Field Firing Ranges including Individual Battle
Shooting Range (IBSR) including:

(1) Battle Inoculation.

(2) Vehicle mounted small arms, pintle mounted


and shoulder controlled (see Note).

(3) The destruction of blinds and misfires.

(4) Single and multiple firing of M18A1 Claymore.

(5) Plan, conduct and act as an Exercise


Assistant during exercises involving blank
ammunition and pyrotechnics.

d. SA (D) (90). Conduct and supervise live firing/throwing on:

(1) Light Anti-Tank Weapon Ranges.

(2) Light Mortar Ranges.

(3) Standard Grenade Range.

(4) Projected grenades, non tactical.

(5) The destruction of blinds and misfires.

(6) Plan, conduct and act as an Exercise


Assistant during exercises involving blank
ammunition and pyrotechnics.

2-10 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

e. SA (E) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during TLFTT and LFTT


exercises on Field Firing Ranges using Infantry
weapon systems including:

(1) Supervision of overhead fire and flanking fire


for Battle Inoculation.

(2) Supervision of vehicle mounted small arms


including pintle mounts and shoulder controlled
weapons (see Note).

f. SA (F) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during the firing/throwing


of the following weapons on purpose built ranges
but only if SA (E) (90) is held, during LFTT:

(1) Light Anti-Tank Weapons.

(2) Grenades.

(3) Light Mortars.

(4) Projected Grenades.

g. SA (G) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during the firing of Light


Anti-Tank Weapons on a purpose built Anti-Tank
Range but only if SA (E) (90) is held, during LFTT.

h. SA (H) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during Grenade throw-


ing on a purpose built Grenade Range but only if SA
(E) (90) is held, during LFTT.

i. SA (I) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during the firing of a


Light Mortar on a purpose built range or specially
designated area but only if SA (E) (90) is held,
during LFTT.

j. SA (J) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during the firing of Pro-


jected Grenades on a purpose built range or spe-
cially designated area but only if SA (E) (90) is
held, during LFTT.

k. SA (K) (90). To act as a Firing Point Supervisor, IC Butts and IC


Console during LFMT.

l. SA (L) (90). Act as a Safety Supervisor during the (single firing


only) of M18A1 Claymore on a specially designated
area, but only if SA (E) (90) is held during LFTT.

PROTECT 2-11
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

m. SA (M) (07). Plan, conduct and act as an Exercise Assistant during


exercises involving blank firing with Infantry Weapon
Systems and pyrotechnics.

Note: Weapons mounted in cupolas or turrets, and fired from under armour require
dedicated Safety Staff to be qualified/authorised in accordance with Section 11 of
Pamphlet No.21.
0243. Current Courses. All qualifying categories are prefixed with the letters SA,
e.g., SA (A) (90). Definitions of categories are in paragraph 0236.
a. Regular Forces.
Qualification Qualification
Ser Rank Remarks
Course Categories
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1a Live Firing Tactical A, C, D 1. Cpls who attend and complete the
Training Platoon PSBC and are awarded the qualification
Commanders A, C or D are NOT empowered to plan
1b Battle Course (PCBC) or conduct ranges in that category or
Offrs disposal of blinds or misfires or super-
Live Firing Tactical WOs A, C, D vise multiple firing of the M18A1
Training Platoon SSgts Claymore until they have attained the
Sergeants Battle Sgts rank of acting or substantive Sgt (not
Course (PSBC) Cpls LSgt).
1c 2. With effect from April 1988 PCBC and
PSBC students of the rank of Sgt and
All Arms Live Firing A, C, D above are also qualified in the prepara-
Tactical Training (All tion of explosive charges for the purpose
Arms) of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating target retal-
iatory devices on Inf SA radio controlled
targets.
2 Range Management Offrs B LCpls who are awarded qualifications B
Qualification (RMQ) WOs are empowered to plan and conduct live
SSgts firing on NDA ranges only until they
Sgts have reached the rank of acting or sub-
Cpls stantive Cpl. LCpls are empowered to
LCpl act as Safety Supervisor during all
forms of LFMT.
3 Section Commanders Cpls B, E, F, L, M 1. LCpls who are awarded qualification
Battle Course (SCBC) LCpls B are NOT empowered to conduct
(from September German A, B and C Type Ranges, GR,
1988) CGR, ETR, MMTTR, purpose built
ranges where static firing of Pintle
Machine Guns until they have attained
the rank of acting or substantive Cpl.
2. For details of SCBC prior to
September 1988 see Past Courses
paragraph.

2-12 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr10

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


4 All Arms Safety WOs E, K
Supervisors Course LCpls

5 RMAS Commissioning OCdt B, M 1. Officer cadets are not empow-


Course ered to Plan and Conduct ranges
unless under supervision, until com-
missioned.
2. The ‘M’ qualification is awared to
officer Cadets from Aug 2010.
6 ‘M’ Qualification All M Pte soldiers are not empowered to
Course Ranks plan and conduct training until they
have attained the rank of acting or
substantive LCpl.

b. Reserve Forces.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


7 Live Firing Tactical Offrs C, D
Training Short WOs
SSgts
Sgts
8 Range Management Offrs B Students who are awarded this
Qualification WOs qualification from 1 Apr 10 are
(Reserve Forces) SSgts empowered to act as IC Butts
Sgts and IC Console.
Cpls
9 Combat Offrs K Students who are awarded this
Marksmanship WOs qualification from 1 Apr 10 are
Coaching Qualification SSgts empowered to act as IC Butts
(CMCQ) (Reserve Sgts and IC Console.
Forces) Cpls
LCpls
10 All Arms NCO SAA SSgts K Students who are awarded this
Instructor (Short) Sgts qualification are not empowered
Cpls to act as IC Butts or IC ETR
LCpls Console.

PROTECT 2-13
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0244. Past Courses.

a. Regular Forces.
Qualification Qualification
Serial Rank Remarks
Course Categories
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 Platoon Weapon (Officers) Offrs A This qualification does NOT
Small Arms Wing, Hythe or permit the use of explosives
Jungle Warfare School for the purposes of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating
target retaliatory devices on
Inf SA radio controlled targets.
2 Battle Shooting Offrs A, C, D
Management WOs
Warminster SSgts
3 Master Coach Offrs B
Warminster WOs
SSgts
4 Infantry Range Qualifying Offrs A This qualification does NOT
Course WOs permit the use of explosives
for the purposes of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating
target retaliatory devices on
Inf SA radio controlled targets.
5 Platoon Weapons (NCOs) WOs B, E, F
Hythe/SAW/JWS SSgts
Junior NCOs Instructors Sgts
Warminster Cpls
6 Advanced Skill at Arms Offrs A This qualification does NOT
Warminster WOs permit the use of explosives
SSgts for the purposes of:
Sgts a. Explosive trench digging.
Cpls b. Setting up and operating
target retaliatory devices on
Inf SA radio controlled targets.
7 Other Arms Platoon Offrs B, D, E
Weapons (Offrs and WOs) WOs
Hythe
8 Other Arms Platoon WOs B, F
Weapons (NCOs) SSgts
Hythe Sgts
Cpls

2-14 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


9 All Arms Recruit Instructor Sgts B Act as a Safety Supervisor
Warminster Cpls on a Grenade Range if
shown on course report.
10 Infantry Range Offrs A This qualification does NOT
WOs permit the use of explosives
SSgts for the purposes of:
Sgts a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating
target retaliatory devices on
Inf SA radio controlled targets.
11 Infantry NCOs Skill at Sgts B, E, F
Arms Course Cpls
12a Divisional SAA Cpl B

12b Depot Instructor Cpl B, F

12c Section Commander Cpl B, E


(Divisional Depot)

12d Divisional SAA (Advanced) Cpl B, E, F


13 Section Commanders Cpls E, F Course conducted during this
Battle Course (SCBC) LCpls period awarded the ‘old’ qual-
(September 1986 to ification categories of B and
August 1988) C. Consequently students
qualified on these courses
are qualified to:
a. Conduct live firing on a 25
m range.
b. Conduct live firing on
Indoor Range, Training
Theatre, Tube Range and
Mobile Portable Range.
14 Other Arms Skill at Arms Offrs B, D In addition students who
Instructor WOs attended this course prior to
(Offrs/WOs/SNCOs) SSgts January 1989 are qualified to
(prior to April 1991) Sgts conduct live firing on an IBSR
but are restricted to one firer
in each lane.
15 Other Arms Skill at Arms WOs B, F Students who are awarded
Instructor (NCOs) SSgts SA (F) are not empowered to
(prior to April 1991) Sgts supervise Platoon and
Cpls Section Light Mortar Ranges.
16 Standard Military Course/ Offr B Officer cadets/student
Standard Graduate Course Cadet officers are not empowered
RMAS Student to conduct ranges unless
Offr under supervision until
commissioned.

PROTECT 2-15
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


17 GPMG(SF) Section Cpls B, E, F With effect from May 1994.
Commanders Course LCpls
(SCSF)
18 Platoon Sergeants SSgts A, C, D 1. Cpls who attend and complete
Battle Course (PSBC) Sgts the PSBC and are awarded the
SAA Phase Cpls qualification A, C or D are NOT
empowered to plan or conduct
ranges in that category or disposal
of blinds or misfires until they have
attained the rank of acting or sub-
stantive Sgt (not LSgt).
2. With effect from April 1988
PCBC and PSBC students of the
rank of Sgt and above are also
qualified in the preparation of
explosive charges for the purpose
of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating target
retaliatory devices on Inf SA radio
controlled targets.
19 Field Firing Qualification Offrs A, C, D 1. Cpls who attend and complete
(FFQ) Course WOs the PSBC and are awarded the
SSgts qualification A, C or D are NOT
Sgts empowered to plan or conduct
ranges in that category or disposal
of blinds or misfires until they have
attained the rank of acting or sub-
stantive Sgt (not LSgt).
2. With effect from April 1988
PCBC and PSBC students of the
rank of Sgt and above are also
qualified in the preparation of
explosive charges for the purpose
of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating target
retaliatory devices on Inf SA radio
controlled targets.

20 Other Arms Unit Training Offrs A, C, D 1. For details of OA SAA


Officers/WOs (OAUTO) WOs (Offrs/WOs/SNCOs) courses prior
(Post April 1991) SSgts to Apr 91 see Serial 14.
Sgts 2. Students are also qualified in the
preparation of explosive charges for
the purpose of:
a. Explosive trench digging.
b. Setting up and operating target
retaliatory devices on Inf SA radio
controlled targets.

2-16 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


21 Other Arms (NCOs) Skill at WOs B, E, G, M LCpls who are awarded the B
Arms Instructor (OASAA) SSgts qualification are NOT empowered
(Post April 1991) Sgts to conduct live firing practices until
Cpls they have attained the rank of act-
LCpls ing or substantive Cpl; however,
they are empowered to act as a
Safety Supervisor within this qual-
ification.
b. Reserve Forces.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
22 All Arms (NCOs) Skill at WOs B, E, H, M LCpls who are awarded the B
Arms Instructor (AAN- SSgts qualification are NOT empow-
COSAA) Sgts ered to conduct live firing prac-
Cpls tices until they have attained the
LCpls rank of acting or substantive Cpl;
however, they are empow- ered
to act as a Safety Super- visor
within this qualification.
23 Senior Skill at Arms Offrs B 1. Those who attended as Offrs
Warminster WOs and WOs are qualified to conduct
SSgts live throwing on a purpose built
Sgts Grenade Range only.
Cpls 2. Act as Safety Supervisors on
Grenade Range.
3. Destroy blinds and misfires.
24 Master Coach Offrs B
Warminster WOs
SSgts
25 Infantry Range (TA) Offrs C, D
WOs
SSgts
Sgts
26 UDR Field Firing Offrs C Students qualified on these
Qualification WOs courses may NOT destroy blinds
SSgts of the following natures:
Sgts a. Anti-Tank ammunition.
b. HE grenades.
27 NCO Skill at Arms Sgts B 1. LCpls who are awarded quali-
Instructor Cpls fication B are NOT empowered
(Reserve Forces) LCpls to conduct German A, B and C
Type Ranges, Gallery Range
ETR and MTT Ranges until they
have attained the rank of acting
of substantive Cpl.
2. LCpls are qualified to com-
mand butts and consoles, except
during the APWT.

PROTECT 2-17
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)


28 Field Firing Qualification Offrs C, D
(FFQ) (Reserve Forces) WOs
SSgts
Sgts
29 Live Firing Tactical Training SSgts A (NI), 1. Cpls who attend and complete the
Platoon Sergeants’s Battle Sgts C (NI), PSBC (NI) and are awarded the quali-
Course (PSBC) (Northern Cpls D (NI) fication A (NI) are NOT empowered to
Ireland) (NI) Phase 2. plan or conduct ranges in that catego-
ry until they have attained the rank of
29a Live Firing Tactical Training Offrs A (NI), acting or substantive Sgt (not LSgt).
Qualification (LFFTQ) (NI) WOs C (NI),
SSgts D (NI) 2. Students who attend PSBC (NI) or
(LFTT (NI) and acquire the qualification
Sgts
SA (A) 90 (NI) are NOT qualified in the
destruction of blinds or misfires.
30 Section Commanders Cpls B, E, H LCpls who are awarded qualification B
Battle Course (NI) LCpls are NOT empowered to conduct
SCBC (NI) German A, B and C Type Ranges,
Gallery Range, ETR and MMTTR
Ranges until they have attained the
rank of acting or substantive Cpl.

30 Range Management Offrs B


Qualification (RMQ) WOs
Course SSgts
Sgts
Cpls
31 Range Management Offrs B
Qualification (RMQ) WOs
Course SSgts
(Home Service Part Time Sgts
and Reserve Forces) Cpls
32 Platoon Sergeants Battle SSgts C 1. Cpls who attend and complete the
Course (NI) PSBC (NI) Sgts PSBC (NI) and are awarded the quali-
Phase 1 Cpls fication C are NOT empowered to
plan or conduct ranges in that catego-
ry or disposal of blinds or misfires until
they have attained the rank of acting
or substantive Sgt (not LSgt).

2. Students who attend and pass


PSBC (NI) are empowered to con-
duct and supervise live firing on pro-
jected grenade ranges.

c. The Royal Irish Regiment (Home Service).


0245 – 0243. Reserved.

2-18 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 4. — QUALIFYING COURSES AND QUALIFICATION


CATEGORIES FOR THE CADET FORCES

CONTENTS
Introduction
INTRODUCTION 2-19
0244. The tables in this section show the
small arms range qualification categories AUTHORITIES 2-19

that can be obtained on current Cadet QUALIFICATION CATEGORIES 2-19


Range Courses.

Authorities
0245. The only qualifying authorities in respect of current courses set out in the
table are as follows:
a. Cadet Training Team
or Brigade Regional Training Teams (RTT) (see Note)

b. Air Cadet Small Arms Training Team (see Note)

c. HQ SASC
Warminster
Wiltshire BA12 0DJ

d. Cadet Training Centre Frimley, Frimley, Surrey GU16 7HD

Note: Courses are supported by a SASC Officer as the SME.


0246. Qualification Categories:
a. Range Management Plan and conduct cadet LFMT with
Qualification (Short Ranges) cadet small bore and full bore weapons
SA (SR) (07) Cadet. on NDA purpose built ranges. Supervise
LFMT on NDA, LDA and FDA purpose
built ranges.

b. Range Management Plan, conduct and supervise cadet LFMT


Qualification (Long Ranges) with cadet small bore and full bore weapons
SA (LR) (07) Cadet. on LDA and FDA purpose built ranges. This
qualification will include Gallery Range,
Converted Gallery Range and ETR.

c. Dismounted Close Use DCCT facilities.


Combat Trainer (DCCT)
Basic Operator.

PROTECT 2-19
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. Automatic Marking Use AMS.


System (AMS) User

e. Ancillary Range Duties Control butts, supervise console and act as


(ARD). a Safety Supervisor. CFAVs with only an
ARD qualification may not conduct ranges.

f. SA (M) (07) Cadets Plan, conduct and act as an Exercise


Assistant for blank firing with Infantry and
cadet weapon systems and
pyrotechnics.

g. Exercise Assistant. Act as an Exercise Assistant during training


with blank ammunition and pyrotechnics.

h. Cadet Force Skill at Arms Teach Skill at Arms and conduct Weapon
Instructor Handling Tests.

0247. Current Courses. Current qualifying courses for the Combined Cadet
Force, Sea Cadet Corps, Army Cadet Force and Air Training Corps are:

Qualification Qualification
Serial Rank Remarks
Course Categories
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 SA (SR) (07) ACF: Offrs and AI’s. SA (SR) (07)
Cadet CCF (RN): Offrs. Cadet
CCF (RAF): Offrs.
CCF (Army): Offrs, SSIs.
SCC: Offrs, CPOs, POs.
Civilian Instructors.
RMR: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
ATC: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
Civilian Instructors,
Regular/Reserve Service Helpers.
Instructor Cadet WO
2 SA (LR) (07) ACF: Offrs and AI’s. SA (LR) (07) Students must
Cadet CCF (RN): Offrs. Cadet have completed
CCF (RAF): Offrs. SA (SR) (07)Cadet.
CCF (Army): Offrs, SSIs.
SCC: Offrs, CPOs, POs.
Civilian Instructors.
RMR: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
ATC: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
Civilian Instructors,
Regular/Reserve Service Helpers.

2-20 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Qualification Qualification
Serial Rank Remarks
Course Categories
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
3 DCCT Basic All CFAV DCCT Basic Students must
Operator Operator have completed
SA (SR) (07)
Cadet.
4 AMS User All CFAV AMS User Students must
have completed
SA (SR) (07)
Cadet.
5 Ancillary ACF: Offrs and AI’s. ARD
Range Duties CCF (RN): Offrs.
CCF (RAF): Offrs.
CCF (Army): Offrs, SSIs.
SCC: Offrs, CPOs, POs.
Civilian Instructors.
RMR: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
ATC: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
6 KGVI Course ACF: Offrs and AI’s. SA (M) (07) Students must
SA (M) (07) CCF (RN): Offrs. Cadet have completed
Cadet (ACF & CCF (RAF): Offrs. AIs, CCF Basic.
CCF) CCF (Army): Offrs, SSIs.
7 SA (M) (07) SCC: Offrs, CPOs, POs. SA (M) (07)
Cadet (SCC, RMR: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs. Cadet
RMR & ATC) ATC: Offrs, WOs, SNCOs.
8 Initial Training ACF: Offrs and AIs. Exercise
Course Assistant

0248. Past courses for the Army Cadet Force, Combined Cadet Force, Sea Cadet
Corps and Air Training Corps are:

a. Cadet Range Conduct Plan, conduct and supervise cadet LFMT


Qualification – Small Bore with cadet small bore weapons on NDA
(CRCQ – SB). purpose built ranges.

b. Cadet Range Conduct Plan, conduct and supervise cadet LFMT


Qualification – Full Bore with cadet full bore weapons on NDA, LDA
(CRCQ – FB). and FDA purpose built ranges, less
MMTTR.

c. Range Management Plan, conduct and supervise cadet LFMT


Qualification (Short Ranges) with cadet small bore and full bore weapons
(RMQ(SR)). on NDA purpose built ranges.

PROTECT 2-21
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. Range Management Plan, conduct and supervise cadet LFMT


Qualification (Long Ranges) with cadet small bore and full bore
(RMQ(LR)). weapons on LDA and FDA purpose built
ranges. This qualification will include (G)
Gallery, (E) Gallery and ETR.

e. Air Rifle Instructor (ARI). Conduct Air Rifle Ranges only. Act as
Small Arms Coach and Safety Supervisor
during cadet LFMT with air rifles and
conduct WHTs.

f. Range Management Train and assess RCOs.


Instructor (RMI).

g. Skill at Arms Instructor Plan and conduct exercises using blank


(Air Cadets) (SAA Inst (AC)). ammunition and pyrotechnics.

h. Blank Firing Safety Supervisor Conduct and supervise training with blank
(BFSS). ammunition and pyrotechnics.

i. Exercise Assistant Act as an Exercise Assistant during


training with blank ammunition and
pyrotechnics.

j. qcWHT Conduct WHT.

k. Weapon Instructor Plan and conduct weapon training


(Air Cadet Organisation). periods and conduct WHTs.

l. Exercising Conducting Officer Plan, conduct and supervise training


(ECO). with blank ammunition and pyrotechnics.

2-22 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Chapter 3

TRAINING WITH BLANK AMMUNITION AND


PYROTECHNICS

CONTENTS

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION 3-1

SECTION 2. BLANK AMMUNITION 3-5

SECTION 3. PYROTECHNICS 3-8

ANNEX A: AN EXAMPLE OF AN EXERCISE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN (EASP) 3A-1

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION

Purpose CONTENTS

PURPOSE 3-1
0301. This chapter contains essential
information for training using blank REFERENCING 3-1
ammunition and pyrotechnics. It also
QUALIFICATIONS 3-2
explains the requirement for written
instructions to support such training, EXERCISE ASSISTANTS 3-2
complete with a suggested example. It gives
EXERCISE CADETS AND CFAV 3-3
guidance on medical requirements and
details the need for hearing and, where EXERCISE WRITTEN INSTRUCTION 3-3
applicable, eye protection.
MEDICAL SUPPORT 3-3
0302. All common pyrotechnics issued for
HEARING PROTECTION 3-3
training are covered in this chapter with
specific safety information for each nature. DRY TRAINING AREAS 3-3

Referencing PERFORMANCE FAILURES 3-4

0303. Chapters 1 and 2 of this pamphlet are to be read and understood before
referencing this chapter.

PROTECT 3-1
Amdt 1/Apr10 PROTECT

0304. Further details for the use of blank ammunition and pyrotechnics are
contained in the relevant GSP. Prior to their use on ranges and training areas, local
orders must be consulted to ascertain any restrictions.

Qualifications
0305. To ensure the safety of cadets or CFAVs taking part and the general public, the
planning and conducting of firing may only be conducted by qualified officers, WOs,
NCOs or CFAVs (see Chapter 2). The risk is reduced to As Low As Reasonably
Practicable (ALARP), thus achieving an acceptable level of safety by means of:
a. Properly defined and applied danger area limits.
b. Proper control by the ECO and the Exercise Assistants.
c. Integrity on the part of the exercising cadets or CFAVs, who are
competent in the safe handling and firing of their weapons (see Chapter 1).
They are to be sufficiently well trained to undertake the demands and
complexities of the exercise.
0306. Exercise Conducting Officer. The Exercise Conducting Officer (ECO) is the
officer/warrant officer, NCO or CFAV appointed by the Senior Planning Officer to be
responsible for the safe conduct of the firing as specified by the Senior Planning
Officers plan in accordance with the relevant Service instructions. The ECO is to be
competent with the weapon system being used, qualified and of appropriate rank and
experience to match the complexity of the exercise being conducted; the ECO may
also be the Planning Officer. The ECO is to ensure the regulations laid down in GSPs
for the use of blank ammunition and pyrotechnics are complied with. He may be
assisted by a number of Exercise Assistants. He is also to ensure that if Pyrotechnics
are require to be destroyed in situ, they are only destroyed by the ATO, he is to be fully
aware of the correct procedures for contacting the ATO.

Exercise Assistants
0307. There is no laid down ratio of Exercise Assistants to exercising cadets or
CFAVs when using blank ammunition or pyrotechnics in dry training, however, there
should be sufficient to ensure that at no stage could the safety regulations applicable
to the exercise be infringed. This assessment is to be made by the Planning Officer or
ECO for the exercise and should take into account the standard of the exercising
cadets set against the type of training being conducted. The ratio of Exercise
Assistants to Exercise Cadets or CFAVs is to be recorded in the EASP.

3-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Exercise Cadets and CFAV


0308. Prior to any form of training with blank ammunition or pyrotechnics exercising
cadets or CFAVs are to receive appropriate training and be formally tested in their use.
This training and testing is to be conducted by a qualified SAA instructor and should
include the various safety regulations for the blank ammunition and pyrotechnics
being used. Cadets are strictly forbidden to be issued or use any form of
pyrotechnics.

Exercise Written Instruction


0309. A written instruction is to be produced for any activity involving the use of
blank ammunition or pyrotechnics. The written instruction must include the Exercise
Action and Safety Plan (EASP) which must contain relevant safety requirements for
the use of blank ammunition and pyrotechnics and be distributed to the exercising
staff as necessary. The written instruction is to be produced by the ECO for the
exercise. A suggested example of the possible headings to be included in the EASP is
at Annex A to this chapter.

Medical Support

0310. The Planning Officer/ECO is responsible for ensuring the level of medical
cover is appropriate to the scale of the exercise (see Section 4 of Chapter 1) and must
refer the matter to the Senior Planning Officer if this level cannot be achieved.

Hearing Protection

0311. The noise of discharge from service weapons can cause considerable
damage to unprotected ears. Whenever cadets or CFAVs are firing blank ammunition
from Inf/Cadet WS and/or using pyrotechnics, the wearing of issued, serviceable
hearing protection is compulsory. This applies to all military and civilian personnel.
Checking for hearing protection is the responsibility of the ECO and his exercise staff,
however, this does not absolve firers of their personal responsibility to safeguard their
own hearing.

Dry Training Areas

0312. Certain training areas designated for dry training may also permit the use of
specific live natures, eg blank ammunition, pyrotechnics. This will only be permitted
when the whole of the ammunition danger area, including that of the demolition stores
used to destroy blinds and misfires, can be contained within the boundary of the
training area. The extent to which this is permitted and any special safety precautions,
will be covered in the standing orders for the use of each training area concerned.

PROTECT 3-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Performance Failures

0313. Blank ammunition or pyrotechnics that fail to perform as designed must be


reported in accordance with Section 6 of Chapter 1.

0314 – 0318. Reserved.

3-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 2. — BLANK AMMUNITION

Safety Precautions CONTENTS

0319. Prior to Use. Whenever blank SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3-5


ammunition is used there is always a danger,
SAFETY RULES 3-6
however remote, that live ammunition could
be introduced. Prior to the use of blank ammunition the ECO is responsible for ensuring
that the measures listed below are formally carried out and in the sequence given:

a. If ammunition is issued in any form other than in factory sealed containers


the ECO is to ensure that a thorough physical check is carried out to ascertain
that only blank ammunition is contained within. This includes the need to
thoroughly check ammunition issued in reconditioned, re-sealed containers.
(Confirmation that containers are factory sealed and not reconditioned and re-
sealed by an ammunition inspectorate or locally by ammunition compound staff
must be sought from issuing personnel.)
b. As part of NSPs a thorough physical check of weapon chambers,
magazines, ammunition pouches, pockets and other personal clothing and
equipment is to be conducted.
c. A declaration is taken from all cadets and CFAVs stating that they do not
have any live ammunition in their possession.
d. A reminder is given to all cadets and CFAVs that they are responsible for
ensuring that every round they fill into a magazine, clip or belt, is blank.
e. The AFB 159B is to be signed by the ECO (a copy is at Section 4 to Chapter 4).
f. CFAV and cadets are to be reminded if any ammunition or pyrotechnics are
found after they have given the declaration, they are to hand it in to a member of
staff.
Note: This procedure is to be followed regardless of whether live ammunition
has been used previously or not. Also, if blank ammunition is issued in unsealed
containers the ECO is to ensure that a check is carried out to ascertain that only
blank ammunition is contained within.
0320. After Use.
a. If an exercise involves a number of activities, at the conclusion of each
activity, during which blank ammunition has been issued, weapons and
equipment are to be inspected and a declaration taken.
b. In accordance with Regulations cadets and CFAVs are to be reminded that
it is an offence to leave the exercise area with live or blank ammunition, empty
cases, pyrotechnics or parts of pyrotechnics (as applicable). A declaration to
that effect is to be given to the ECO by all exercising cadets and staff.

PROTECT 3-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

c. After all firing has finished and before leaving the exercise area, the ECO is
to ensure that all empty and reconditioned ammunition containers and salvage
are collected. All blank rounds and any live rounds that may have been picked
up on the training area and empty cases are segregated for return to store. The
following are then inspected by the ECO (or those range staff nominated) before
the final declaration is taken:
(1) All magazines and ammunition containers.
(2) All weapons.
(3) Cadets and CFAVs personal equipment and clothing.
(4) A Certificate Free From Explosives (CFFE) signed by the ECO or a
Safety Supervisor is to be placed in each empty container(s). When
vehicles have been used to transport ammunition a thorough inspection is
to take place.
d. Anyone who is detailed to return ammunition to store must be inspected,
and a declaration taken after its return.
e. The AFB 159A must be signed by the ECO on completion of the above. An
example of an AFB 159A and AFB 159B is given in Section 4 of Chapter 4.

Safety Rules
0321. Detailed below is a summary of the main safety rules for the use of blank
ammunition. This summary should be read in conjunction with the appropriate GSP:
a. When firing blank ammunition the use of a correctly fitted Blank Firing
Attachment (BFA) and associated equipment eg blank firing magazine (A2
system as detailed in the relevant GSP, is mandatory. It is the responsibility
of the ECO to ensure that BFAs and associated equipment are correctly fitted
prior to the commencement of training. This check is to be carried out by those
nominated as Exercise Assistants under the direction of the ECO.
b. When firing blank ammunition for cadet forces, the following safety areas
are to be observed from the muzzle of the weapon:
(1) L85A2 Rifle and L86A2 LSW (A2 version only) — 5 metres forward
and 2 metre in the vertical and horizontal plane.
(2) L98A1 Cadet GP Rifle – 50 metres (no SBFS available).
(3) L98A2 Cadet GP Rifle – 5 metres forward and 2 metre in the vertical
and horizontal plane .
(4) If civilians are present the distance is extended to 30 metres for all
weapons. Less the L98A1 Cadet GP Rifle which will extend to 100 metres.

3-6 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

c. Weapons are generally only to be loaded and unloaded in the prone


position. However, when authorised by the ECO or when dictated by the
ground/exercise loading and unloading may be carried out from the standing
position.
d. Cadets may fire blank ammunition from a prepared fire trench, provided
they can do so safely with regards to their size.
e. Cadets are NEVER to fire their weapons on the move.
f. When moving, weapons are to be in the ‘Made Safe’ state (L98A1), unless
the weapons being used are fitted with a Safe Blank Firing System (SBFS) and
associated equipment e.g. Blank Firing Attachment and Blank Firing magazine
(L98A2) when the safety catch is to be applied.
g. At night all weapons are to be inspected by the ECO or an Exercise
Assistant using “White Light”, to ensure all weapons are clear.
0322. – 0327. Reserved.

PROTECT 3-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 3. — PYROTECHNICS
CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3-8


Safety Precautions
SIMULATOR BATTLE SOUND (SBS) L35A1 3-9
0328. Prior to Use. If pyrotechnics are SMOKE GRENADES 3-10
not being used in conjunction with live or TRIPFLARES 3-10
blank ammunition it is still mandatory to carry
out NSPs. THE 1.5 INCH ROCKET FLARE, ROCKET
HAND FIRED 3-11

0329. After Use. PISTOL SIGNAL 16 MM MINIFLARE 3-12

a. If an exercise involves a number PYROTECHNICS


of activities, at the conclusion of each The ECO is responsible for ensuring
activity during which pyrotechnics that the pyrotechnics intended for use
have been issued, weapons and
during the exercise are permitted on
equipment are to be inspected and a
declaration taken. the training area allocated

b. In accordance with Regulations cadets and CFAVs are to be reminded that


it is an offence to leave the exercise area with live or blank ammunition, empty
cases, pyrotechnics or parts of pyrotechnics (as applicable). A declaration to
that effect is to be given to the ECO by all exercising cadets and staff.

c. After all firing has finished and before leaving the exercise area, the ECO is
to ensure that all empty and reconditioned ammunition containers and salvage
are collected. Any live rounds that may have been picked up on the training area
are segregated for return to store. The following are then inspected by the ECO
(or those range staff nominated) before the final declaration is taken:

(1) All magazines and ammunition containers.

(2) All weapons.

(3) Cadets and CFAVs personal equipment and clothing.

(4) A Certificate Free From Explosives (CFFE) signed by the ECO or a


Safety Supervisor is to be placed in each empty container(s). When
vehicles have been used to transport ammunition a thorough inspection is
to take place.

d. Anyone who is detailed to return ammunition to store must be inspected,


and a declaration taken after its return.

e. The AFB 159A must be signed by the ECO on completion of the above. An
example of an AFB 159A and AFB 159B is given in Section 4 of Chapter 4.

3-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Simulator Battle Sound (SBS) L35A1

0330. Simulator Battle Sound (SBS) are explosives used during exercises and
demonstrations to simulate the noise of mortar fire, shell fire or Claymores. They are
powerful explosives and can cause injury and damage to equipment. It is important,
therefore, that CFAVs using them understand and comply with the rules laid down for
their use.

a. The simulator is a powerful pyrotechnic capable of inflicting serious injury if


used without care. In particular it can cause hearing loss. Cadets taking part in
exercises where it is to be used MUST wear issued serviceable hearing
protection. Its use in confined spaces, such as rooms or weapon pits,
dangerously increases the effect of the explosion and is forbidden.

b. The directions for use are printed on the simulator and are to be strictly
obeyed, with the following additions:

(1) Simulators are to be thrown by hand, downwards, on to open ground


free from loose stones or debris and are NOT to be projected by any other
method.

(2) Whilst carrying the simulator, the removable top is to remain fitted
until required for use.

(3) The construction of the simulator is not to be tampered with or


modified.

(4) Simulators are NOT to be thrown from, into, or near vehicles,


equipment, inflammable stores, barns, haystacks, or in any location where
there is a fire risk.

(5) When throwing a series of simulators, the thrower is to count the


explosions. All blinds are to be located and destroyed by an ATO.

(6) Simulators are only to be prepared for use when required. They are
NOT to be prepared in anticipation of use. Simulators once prepared must
be thrown or disposed of by an ATO.

c. When simulators are used in training or at tattoos, displays,


demonstrations, etc. the following safety distances are to be observed from the
point of burst:

(1) When the general public is present — 100 metres. In cases where a
distance of 100 metres is not obtainable, the unit concerned is to apply to
the local ATO for authority to use a shorter distance on that occasion.

(2) When the general public is not present — 10 metres.

PROTECT 3-9
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. Any simulator that has got wet but has not been prepared for use by
breaking the seal MUST be dried before repackaging into the H83 container.

e. When there is a genuine requirement to use the simulator as a training


expedient in some manner not detailed above, the Senior Planning Officer is to
apply to the local ATO, who will give the necessary guidance.

Smoke Grenades

0331. General. Smoke producing grenades or generators are not to be used in


confined spaces, buildings occupied by cadets and CFAVs or livestock or in barns,
haystacks or any location where there is a fire risk. Cadets and CFAVs are not to be
exposed to high or persistent concentrations of the smoke. Smoke grenades must be
thrown and never placed by hand. If smoke is likely to drift across roads, sentries are
to be posted in advance to each side of the screen to warn traffic of the hazard ahead.

0332. Grenade Hand Smoke Screening Training. These grenades are issued
primed and cannot be unprimed. There is no phosphorous content but there is an
emission of white smoke. They are to be used as a substitute for the L84 grenade
during training. No special range or danger area is required. However, blinds are to be
destroyed by an ATO.

0333. Grenade Hand Signal Smoke. These grenades are issued primed and
cannot be unprimed. There is no phosphorous content but there is an emission of
coloured smoke. No special range or danger area is required. However, blinds are to be
destroyed by an ATO.

Tripflares

0334. When ignited the tripflare will produce fierce magnesium heat which can cause
severe burns. On areas to which the public cannot be denied access, once set up and
armed, the tripflare is to be kept under surveillance at all times. Additional safety
measures are to be put in place to ensure that civilians cannot approach to within 100
metres of an armed tripflare. Where a warning is given but disregarded the tripflare is to
be disarmed.

0335. The setting up and dismantling of the flare is described in Reference G


(Pamphlet No. 13, Grenades). The following safety rules are to be adhered to:

a. Before setting up or dismantling the Flare Tripwire Kit L10A1 ensure that
the safety pin is in position and that the pivot arm is not under tension.

b. Flares with missing safety pins or loose and missing pivot screws are to be
destroyed as a blind by an ATO.

c. The safety pin is not to be removed or replaced unless the trip wire is

3-10 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

secured to the clamp. Personnel are to ensure that their head is kept below the
level of the flare pot during all setting up and disarming drills.

d. Tripflares are not to be initiated by use of electric detonators or by means of


a SHRIKE.

e. At the end of the exercise unused flares are to be disarmed and dismantled.
The area is to be cleared of burnt out flares, trip wire and pickets which, if left,
pose a danger to the public, livestock and wild animals. Both unused and burnt
out flares, tripwire and pickets are to be accounted for as a further check to
ensure they have been recovered and do not pose any residual hazard.

f. If the tripflare is to be used in close proximity to any range store or target


mechanism consideration must be made to the fire hazard that exists. A
minimum distance of 3m is to be applied.

The 1.5 inch Rocket Flare/Rocket Hand Fired L10A1/L11A1/L12A2

0336. The 1.5 inch Rocket Flare/Rocket Hand Fired L10A1/L11A1/L12A2 is an


illuminant. The handling drills are contained in Reference G (Pamphlet No. 13,
Grenades). The following safety rules are to be adhered to:

a. It is only to be fired on ranges, field firing or training areas where the range/
training area orders allow it. Personnel selected to fire a flare must have
received formal training and been formally tested and be current in its use.

b. The ECO should brief the firer on:

(1) The position from which the flare is to be fired.

(2) The direction in which the flare is to be fired. (The flare must be
contained within the allocated training area.)

(3) The angle at which the flare is to be fired. (If fired vertically the flare is
capable of reaching a height of 1,000 feet. This height could exceed the
permitted Air Danger Height (ADH) for the range or training area. When
using the rocket flare the published ADH for the range or training area
must not be exceeded.)

c. Flares are not to be fired:

(1) At persons.

(2) In any direction which may result in the flare striking or falling on
persons.

(3) Under circumstances where a fire hazard exists.

PROTECT 3-11
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(4) Where overhead obstruction would cause the flare to be deflected.

d. Once the flare is prepared for firing it is to be kept pointing in a safe direction
with the base held away from the body:

(1) Rocket Flare. Once the pin is removed from the bottom plate the
flare is to be fired or destroyed as a blind.

(2) Rocket Hand Fired. The flare can be reconstituted once prepared.
However, this flare should always be used first if one is required.

e. A misfired or damaged flare is to be destroyed as a blind by an ATO.

f. Under no circumstances are flares to be fired over the heads of cadets


or CFAV.

The Pistol Signal 16 mm Miniflare

0337. The miniflare is a straight tubular pistol incorporated in an 8-flare cartridge


pack. The flare colour is marked on the cartridge with a night identification symbol on
the outside of the pack.

0338. The flare burns for approximately 5 seconds at an approximate height of 90


metres. The handling drills are contained in Reference G (Pamphlet No. 13, Grenades).
The following safety rules are to be adhered to:

a. It is to be fired on ranges, field firing or training areas where the range or


training area orders permit it.

b. Firing is only to be carried out by personnel who have received instruction


and been formally tested, and are current in the correct handling of the pistol.

c. Flares are not to be fired at personnel or in a direction which may result in


them falling on persons, vehicles or equipment, or fired under circumstances in
which a fire hazard exists.

d. The pistol is not to be carried with a cartridge in position. Cartridges are not
to be removed from the pack except by correct insertion of the pistol, an action
that is to take place only immediately prior to firing.

e. With a cartridge in position the pistol is to be pointed upwards, in a safe


direction and kept away from the body.

f. A cartridge which still fails to fire after the correct misfire drill has been
carried out is to be removed from the pistol, placed to one side and returned to
store to await disposal action by an ATO or AT.

3-12 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Annex A To
Chapter 3

THE HEADINGS CONTAINED IN THIS EXERCISE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN


(EASP) ARE AN EXAMPLE AND ONLY TO BE USED AS A GUIDE FOR PLANNING

Your Reference Unit Address

Unit Contact Numbers

See Distribution Date


EXERCISE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN (EASP) — CASEVAC
UNDER FIRE
List the references to be used in the EASP. For example:

A. Inf Trg Vol IV Pam No 21-C, Regulations for Cadets Training with
Cadet and Infantry Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics - 2008.
General
1. Opening paragraph stating the aim of the exercise and outlining who,
when and where the activity is to take place.

Aim
2. State the aim of the EASP.

Appointments
3. List the key appointments, for example:
Ser Appointment Rank Name Quals Held Remarks
1 Exercise Director

2 Senior Planning Officer


3 Planning Officer
Senior Exercise
4 Conducting Officer (SECO)

PROTECT 3A-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Ser Appointment Rank Name Quals Held Remarks


Exercise Conducting
5 Officer (ECO)
6 Exercise Assistant
7 Exercise Assistant
8 Ammunition NCO/CFAV
9 Enemy
10 Enemy
11 Medical

Risk Assessments
4. Exercise Risk Assessment. State if the Safe System of Training is
in place, or if not, include the risk assessment and where appropriate the
2* dispensation to cover the aspect that does not comply.
a. Safe System of Training. Should any training incident or
accident occur the details contained in Section 6 of Chapter One to
Reference A are to be followed. It is the responsibility of the
SECO/ECO to ensure that the procedure is understood by all
members of the exercise staff and exercising cadets and CFAVs.
5. Medical Risk Assessment. Explain in outline the Medical Risk
Assessment:
a. Immediate Action (IA)
(1) Explain and list the IA procedure.
b. Minor Casualty. After the IA, the following plan will be carried
out:
(1) Explain the procedure for a minor casualty.
c. Major Casualty. After the IA, the following plan will be carried
out:
(1) Explain the procedure for a major casualty.
6. Changes/Amendments to the Exercise Plan. State that any
change is to be recorded and signed by the ECO.
2

3A-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Staff Duties
7. ECO. List the responsibilities of the ECO to conduct this exercise.
8. Exercise Staff (Enemy/Role Player).
a. Duties. List the responsibilities of the Exercise Staff
(Enemy/Role Player) and in accordance with the relevant
publications.
b. Safety Brief.
(1) List the generic safety points for the Exercise Staff.

Lesson Plan (Exercise Staff)


9. List the procedure and safety briefing for the exercising staff:
a. Normal Safety Precautions (NSPs). State the procedure for
conducting the exercise staff NSPs.
b. Declaration. State that a declaration from the exercise staff
must be carried out at this point to ensure they have no LIVE
ammunition before issuing BLANK ammunition.

c. Hearing Protection. State the importance of checking for


serviceable, issued hearing protection and include the mandatory
requirement to wear hearing protection.

d. Safety Brief. The following safety points are to be enforced:

(1) List the safety points particular to each member of the


exercising staff.

e. Aim. State the aim of the exercise.


f. Training Objectives. List the training objectives of the
exercise.
g. Scoring System. Explain the scoring system and HPS/Pass
Mark.
10. Rehearsals/Walkthrough. Explain the Rehearsals/Walk-through
procedure. A sketch map is to be included as an Annex.
3

PROTECT 3A-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Lesson Plan (Exercise Cadets)


11. List the procedure and safety briefing for the exercising cadets and
CFAVs:
a. NSPs. State the procedure for conducting the exercise cadets
and CFAVs.
b. Declaration. State that a declaration from the exercising
troops must be carried out at this point to ensure they have no LIVE
ammunition before issuing BLANK and the ECO is to sign an AFB
159B at this stage.
c. Hearing Protection. State the importance of checking for
serviceable, issued hearing protection and include the mandatory
requirement to wear hearing protection.
d. Safety Brief. The following safety points are to be enforced:
(1) List the safety points for the exercising troops.
e. Medical. List the medical procedure for the exercising cadets
and CFAVs.
f. Layout of Area. Explain the layout of the area.
g. Revision. Conduct revision where appropriate.
h. Introduction. State the aim, incentive and reason why the
exercise is being conducted.
i. Training Objectives and Scoring System. List the training
objectives, Scoring System and HPS/Mark
j. Teaching Phase (Battle Lesson only). The lesson plan is to
be included as an Annex to the document.
k. Initial Battle Picture. State the initial battle picture to be
given for the exercise.
l. Final Battle Picture. State the final battle picture to be given
for the exercise.
m. Conduct of the Exercise. Listed below is a likely sequence
of events.

3A-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Ser Timings Position Event Signal Remarks


(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 H–15 Battle prep Final battle prep Verbal ECO All weapons
area loaded and made
ready.
2 H–10 Overwatch Final battle picture Verbal ECO

3 H–9 Overwatch Enemy to load and Radio ECO


make ready
4 H–5 Overwatch Sect Comd brief up Verbal Sect
sect Comd
5 H–1 Ex area Sect moves off on
the axis
6 H Hour Ex area Enemy opens fire Radio ECO

7 H+1 Ex area Sect reacts to EEF

8 H+5 Ex area Sect takes casualty Verbal ECO

9 H+7 Ex area Sect extracts casu-


alty from KA
10 H+10 Ex area Casualty treated in
cover
11 H+15 Ex area Sect extract Verbal Sect
Comd
12 H+20 Ex area Endex Verbal ECO Stop Stop Stop

13 H+21 Ex area All weapons Verbal ECO


cleared
14 H+25 Ex area Enemy cleared Verbal ECO Brief points from
enemy
n. Action at the End of Each Exercise. List the actions to be
conducted at the end of each exercise.
o. Action on Completion of the Final Exercise. List the
actions to be conducted at the end of the days training.
p. Action on Return to Barracks. List the actions to be
conducted on returning to barracks.
5

PROTECT 3A-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(Signature)

Name
Rank
For Exercise Director
Annexes:
A. Sketch Map in Detail.
B. Sketch Map in General.
C. Lesson Plan.

Distribution:

OC
All Exercise Assistants

Copy to:

CO (Exercise Director)
Training Wing Officer
File

3A-6 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Annex A to
Your Reference
Dated

SKETCH MAP — EASP (CASEVAC UNDER FIRE)


BE AREA
N

SG
KG

Approx 300 m

Position of SBN L29 Road


Wood Track

KG Enemy Killing Group Area for SBN L28


SG Enemy Stop Group Route of Ex troops

A-1

PROTECT 3A-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Annex C to
Your Reference
Dated

LESSON PLAN (Battle Lesson only)

1. The lesson plan for the battle lesson is to be included here.

C-1

3A-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Chapter 4
LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING
CONTENTS
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION 4-1

SECTION 2. PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 4-3

SECTION 3. RANGE DANGER AREAS FOR LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 4-7

SECTION 4. COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR LIVE FIRING


MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 4-11

SECTION 5. CONDUCT OF LIVE FIRING WITH SERVICE WEAPONS BY CIVILIANS 4-23

SECTION 6. AIR RIFLE RANGES 4-27

SECTION 7. THE TRAINING THEATRE AND INDOOR RIMFIRE RANGES 4-31

SECTION 8. MOBILE AND PORTABLE RANGES (RIMFIRE) 4-36

SECTION 9. TUBE AND ENCLOSED RANGES 4-40

SECTION 10. THE 1908 DESIGN BARRACK RANGE 4-44

SECTION 11. THE 25 METRE BARRACK RANGE 4-48

SECTION 12. THE GALLERY RANGE (GR) AND CONVERTED GALLERY RANGE (CGR) 4-52

SECTION 13. THE ELECTRIC TARGET RANGE (ETR) 4-61

ANNEX A: AN EXAMPLE OF A RANGE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN (RASP) 4A-1

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION

Purpose CONTENTS

PURPOSE 4-1
0401. This chapter deals exclusively with
Live Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT) REFERENCING 4-1
fired on purpose built ranges and in
accordance with the practices laid down in AUTHORISED LIVE FIRING PRACTICES 4-2

Service manuals and Cadet Force Manual. STRUCTURE AND LAYOUT 4-2

Referencing

0402. Chapters 1 and 2 of this pamphlet are to be read and understood before
referencing this chapter.

PROTECT 4-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0403. Sections 1 to 3 of this chapter contain information that is relevant to all ranges
used for LFMT. It is essential that those conducting or supervising live firing are
familiar with these sections before referencing the section dealing with the specific
range to be used.

Authorised Live Firing Practices

0404. Only authorised LFMT practices that are contained within Service and Cadet
manuals may be fired on these ranges. It is permitted to extract complete practices from
different live firing lessons in order to produce a customised shoot to suit specific needs.

0405. Changing of conditions from within practices is NOT permitted. As it is likely to


produce a Cone of Fire (C of F) greater than that for which the range was designed.
The result of which could be shots escaping from the RDA.

0406. Cadet Force Shooting Teams who are required to practice matches, belonging
to other nations, prior to departing overseas, are to gain authority to fire those matches
on UK ranges from HQ SASC.

Structure and Layout

0407. Under no circumstances are cadets or CFAV to conduct any form of Live
Firing Marksmanship Training at night.

0408. This chapter is structured to follow the progression of LFMT, starting with the
No Danger Area (NDA) ranges and moving through to the Electric Target Range
(ETR). Each section dealing with a specific range follows a common layout, which
includes the following:

a. A table showing the qualifications required by personnel conducting or


supervising live firing.

b. A summary of the actions to be completed by the RCO, before and after firing.

c. The restriction or limitations that commonly apply to that particular type of


range.

d. Rules that are specific to the conduct of live firing on that particular type of range.

0409 – 0413. Reserved

4-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 2. — PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4–3
0414. The aim of Live Firing Marksman-
ship Training (LFMT) is to achieve the DRESS 4–3
Marksmanship Standards as laid down in the
MEDICAL COVER 4–3
relevant cadet syllabus. The Training
Objectives (TO) to be achieved are also RECONNAISSANCE 4–3
contained within the relevant cadet syllabus
RANGE ACTION SAFETY PLAN (RASP) 4–4
and are clearly defined, simple and
achievable. BRIEFINGS 4–5

0415. The planning of LFMT must be meticulous to ensure the activity is conducted
safely and in accordance with rules contained in the relevant cadet syllabus and the
relevant GSPs and Local Range Standing Orders and Local Range Orders. The rules
and guidelines contained in this chapter are to be followed during the planning phase.

Dress

0416. The dress for LFMT is specified in the cadet syllabus and ensures that
personnel are able to meet the Marksmanship Standard wearing the appropriate
dress and equipment.

Medical Cover

0417. The Planning Officer/RCO is responsible for ensuring the provision of


adequate medical cover appropriate to the scale of the live firing activity. If this provision
is not available he is to refer the matter to the Senior Planning Officer (see Chapter 1).
Unless specified in Range Orders, range users are not to contact the Emergency
Services direct. All such tasking is to be actioned by Range Control.

Reconnaissance

0418. General. Reconnaissance is a vital part of the planning process. The RCO
is to reconnoitre the range after consulting Range Control, to obtain access and
establish the facilities and targets that are available/required. Some points to be
considered are listed in the following paragraphs.

0419. Range Orders. Planning must take into account the regulations set out for
the particular range. It is therefore essential that a copy of the orders is obtained and
read. The Range Orders must be read before planning LFMT and note taken of the
following:

PROTECT 4-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

a. The ammunition and weapons that may be used. (As detailed on the MOD
Form 904 and copied in Range Orders).

b. Firing times and any restrictions, including the 200 mils rule.

c. Access to the range and vehicle parking.

d. Flags and sentry requirements (including possible need for air sentries
when firing 7.62 mm Ball).

e. Communication requirements.

f. Action in the event of an incident or accident.

g. Medical requirements.

h. The signal to stop firing.

i. Availability and types of targets and who sets them up.

Range Action and Safety Plan (RASP)

0420. It is mandatory for a RASP to be produced specific to each activity for all LFMT
with Inf and Cadet WS. It is to be produced by the Planning Officer/RCO as a stand-
alone document or included as an annex to the Coordinating Instruction. In the event
that a Coordinating Instruction is not produced there will be a need to include some of
the administrative aspects within the document. The headings which may be included
and are not exhaustive in a RASP covering a LFMT activity fired on a purpose built
range are given at Annex A to this chapter. The purpose of the RASP is to:

a. Show that the RCO has followed an acknowledged planning process,


covering all aspects of safe training and as such it provides a clear audit trail.

b. Give an outline of the RCO’s personal responsibilities on the range, before,


during and after firing.

c. Detail the responsibilities of Safety Supervisors and other range staff.

d. Describe the rehearsal procedures if required.

e. Detail the points/subjects that are to be covered during safety briefings to all
range staff and participating troops.

f. It is not mandatory for the RASP to be issued to Range Control unless


specified in Range Standing Orders.

4-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Briefings

0421. Comprehensive briefings will reduce the possibility of accidents. Briefings for
LFMT on the ranges covered in this chapter should follow the format at Annex A.

0422. The RCO is to hold a briefing prior to the LFMT activity. All range staff
involved are to attend.

0423. All Staff. All staff must know the following:

a. The Training Objective(s) of the LFMT activity.

b. The general outline and sequence of events.

c. The signal to stop firing and the action to be taken in an emergency.

d. The actions to be taken on:

(1) The outbreak of fire.

(2) A firer being left behind during run downs.

(3) Observing a dangerous practice.

e. Any safety rules peculiar to the range in use.

f. If persons, animals, vehicles, ships or aircraft are seen to enter, or are about
to enter the danger area, firing is to stop, safety catches are to be applied and
the RCO informed at once. Any further action is to be controlled by the RCO.

g. The actions on an incident or accident.

0424. Safety Supervisors. Safety Supervisors, who may also act as shooting
coaches, must know the following:

a. The handling drills, safety rules and firing characteristics of the weapons to
be supervised. Safety Supervisors are to have passed WHTs for those weapons
within 6 months in accordance with Chapter 5.

b. The permitted states of readiness of weapons during movement on and


forward of the firing point.

c. The details of the practices to be fired and the way in which they are to be
controlled.

d. When coaching the Rifle and LSW coaches are not to adopt the same
position as the firer if within 2 metres of the weapon. This is due to the possibility
of being struck by an empty case.

PROTECT 4-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0425. Signallers and Telephone Operators. Signallers and telephone operators


must know:

a. Frequencies and alternatives, if appropriate.

b. The action to be taken if contact with the butts/console is lost including


advising the OIC Butts/Console and RCO at once.

c. Communications to be used in the event of an accident.

0426. OIC Butts/Console. The OIC Butts/Console must know:

a. The signals to raise and lower targets and the duration of exposures.

b. Which firing point and lanes are in use.

c. The safety rules governing entry and departure from the butts/console.

d. The details of the practices to be fired and the way in which they are to be
controlled.

0427. Firers. The Senior Planning Officer is to ensure that all cadets and CFAVs
participating in the LFMT activity are trained and competent to take part in the activity.

0428. The RCO is to ensure that everyone is thoroughly briefed. A Safety Brief is to
include the following:

a. The signal to stop firing.

b. The action to be taken on receipt of the signal to stop firing.

c. A warning that only targets in the firer’s lane are to be engaged and that
firing cross lane is not permitted.

d. Safe handling rules applicable to weapons in use.

e. Any limitations on movement.

f. Action on Casualties.

0429 – 0433. Reserved.

4-6 PROTECT
PROTECT

SECTION 3. — RANGE DANGER AREAS FOR LIVE FIRING


MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4–7
0434. Whenever weapons are fired during
training it must be on an approved purpose DEFINITIONS 4–7
built range, authorised for use on MOD Form
PURPOSE BUILT NO DANGER AREA
904 and for which a current safety certificate (NDA) RANGES 4–8
MOD Form 905 has been issued. To ensure
the safety of cadets taking part and the PURPOSE BUILT LIMITED DANGER AREA
(LDA) RANGES 4–8
general public, the preparation, conduct and
supervision of firing may only be carried out PURPOSE BUILT FULL DANGER AREA
(FDA) RANGES 4–9
by qualified officers, WOs, NCOs or CFAVs
(see Chapter 2). An acceptable level of 200 MILS RULE 4–9
safety is achieved by means of:

a. Properly defined and applied danger area limits.

b. Proper control by the RCO conducting LFMT and the Safety Supervisors.

c. Integrity on the part of the firers, who have been properly trained and tested
in the safe handling of their weapons.

d. Design aspects of the range, its construction, maintenance and routine


inspections.

Definitions

0435. Range Danger Area. The Range Danger Area (RDA) relevant to all ranges
may be defined as follows:

‘Those areas of land or water together with a specified volume of air above,
within which danger to life, limb or property may be expected to occur, arising
from the initiation of specified ammunition, explosive or ordnance natures.’

0436. Range Danger Area Template. A RDA template for a purpose built range,
is a technical drawing which defines the boundary or prescribed risk from firing
authorised weapons on a specified Line of Fire (L of F) bearing on a range built to an
approved type drawing. The RDA template will only apply to a range built to the
specifications laid down in the type drawing. The RDA template is a type drawing and
weapon/ammunition specific. The designs are based on the assumption that the
standards of range conduct and discipline will be of the highest order.

PROTECT 4-7
PROTECT

Purpose Built No Danger Area (NDA) Ranges

0437. Design. The design of this type of range eliminates the need for a danger
area beyond the range structure. It must be appreciated that any deviation from the
specified range conduct procedures, or any deterioration in maintenance, may ren-
der the range unsafe for use. The bullet catcher, stop butt and retaining wall or walls
are constructed to ensure all rounds are contained within the range construction.

0438. The following are included in this group of ranges:

a. Indoor rimfire ranges including training theatres.

b. Standard 25 metre ranges.

c. Tube range.

d. Small arms test range.

e. Mobile range.

f. Underground range.

g. Indoor air rifle range.

Purpose Built Limited Danger Area (LDA) Ranges

0439. Design. This type of range has been designed and built with the specific
intention of limiting the danger area of the ammunition approved for use on it. It is
essential that the rules and procedures for conduct contained in this section are
adhered to.

0440. The range design will incorporate features to limit the danger area by
construction, or a combination of construction and angle of elevation. These features
are intended to either capture the round or reduce the ricochet distance. They include:

a. The stop butt composition and face profile (slope).

b. The mantlet height and forward face profile (slope).

c. Raised firing points and raised target line, creating a hollow ground effect to
reduce the risk of ricochet.

d. Soft cladding on hard surfaces.

0441. Quadrant Elevation (QE). The specific rules for weapons and ranges are
contained in the relevant sections of this chapter. It is essential that the QE of the
weapons, on the line of sight from the firing point to the target, does not exceed that
allowed by the range design and stated in range orders.

4-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

0442. Gallery Range (GR)/Converted Gallery Range (CGR). A detailed


description of the range and the danger area is contained in Reference A (JSP 403
Volume 2). It is known that a 7.62 mm or 5.56 mm round, when fired at an angle of
approximately 600 mils, could travel as far as 4000 metres. A GR has an approved
Limited Danger Area (LDA) because of the range design and construction. The length
of the approved LDA is 1830 metres from the target line. Therefore any deterioration
in maintenance may render this range danger area inappropriate.

Purpose Built Full Danger Area (FDA) Ranges

0443. Design. Full details of the danger areas and descriptions of FDA Ranges
are contained in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2).

0444. The following are included in this group of ranges:

a. Electric Target Range (ETR).

b. Mechanised Moving Target Trainer Range (MMTTR).

0445. The increase in size of the danger area, compared to that of the GR/CGR, is
due to the following factors:

a. There is no stop butt or mantlet to capture rounds in free flight.

b. As targets are situated at or near ground level, a higher incident of long


ranging ricochets can be expected up to 2900 metres. Even those ricochets
which have struck the ground for a second time may travel to 2900 metres.

c. Because the QE on ETRs is restricted to below 150 mils the length of the
RDA is reduced from 4000 metres to 2900 metres.

200 Mils Rule

0446. A danger area can be better utilised by the building of ranges adjacent to each
other. Concurrent use of ranges adjacent to GR/CGR is governed by the 200 mils rule:

a. The 200 mils rule allows firing to take place simultaneously on adjoining,
adjacent ranges at certain distances. This is determined by measuring the
angle, by accurate use of a prismatic compass, formed between the nearest
flank on the firing point of a GR/CGR to be used, and the nearest flank firer of the
other range in use. If this angle is 200 mils or more, firing may proceed at the
distances intended.

b. Where application of the procedure outlined in sub-paragraph a. cannot


produce an angle of 200 mils consideration could be given to closing certain
target lanes on either or both ranges until the 200 mils angle is achieved.

PROTECT 4-9
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

c. This rule may only be applied, however, where both ranges are properly
constructed, the GR/CGR from which the 200 mils angle is being measured has
the full 1.8 metres depth of mantlet visible to all firers and has targets properly
presented in their approved positions. No firing point may be used which is level
with or beyond the target line of the adjacent range.

d. Range Orders must be consulted to determine whether the 200 mils rule
can be applied and should detail which firing points it can be applied from and to.

0447. The 200 mils rule cannot be applied from an ETR or MMTTR. Due to the
design of these ranges the full SA safety angle of 590 mils for an ETR or 620 for a
MMTTR must be applied.

0448 – 0452. Reserved.

4-10 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 4. — COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES


FOR LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

CONTENTS
Introduction
INTRODUCTION 4-11
0453. The range danger areas and the USE OF FLAGS 4-11
design characteristics of ranges will largely
WORDS OF COMMAND 4-12
dictate the safety rules for the weapons
allowed to be used on them. There are, SUSPENSION OF FIRING 4-12

however, certain rules that are common to all SAFETY SUPERVISION 4-13
LFMT. INSPECTIONS 4-13

AMMUNITION 4-14
Use of Flags FALLING PLATES 4-16

HEARING PROTECTION 4-18


0454. General. Red flags are used to
indicate danger. The system is as follows:

a. Range Boundary Flags. As specified in range bye-laws, (if enacted) and


the Range Orders, flags are located around the range boundary to warn civilian
and military personnel when the range danger area is in use. Signs, notices,
sentries and manned or locked barriers may also be required at specified points.

b. Range in Use Flags. On each range in use, a red flag is to be raised on a


specified high point, ie GR stop butt or 25 metre range wall. The flags remain
raised and indicate to all, that those specific ranges are in use. They are lowered
at the cessation of firing.

c. Butt Flag. A red butt flag is displayed in the butts to indicate to the RCO and
firing detail that it is unsafe to load or continue to fire. The butt flag is to be
displayed until all markers are under cover in the gallery. No one is to leave the
gallery until the cessation of firing has been notified by the RCO. Markers are then
to raise the butt flag. Only then is it safe to move out. ONLY IN AN EMERGENCY
is the butt flag to be raised WITHOUT permission from the RCO. The butt flag
must only be raised from beneath the cover provided by the markers gallery.
Under no circumstances, even if the butt flag has been raised in an emergency,
may anyone leave the butts until contact with the RCO has been made. There
may be occasions, due to the practices being conducted (eg zeroing) or the
manpower available, it is impractical to have a butt party when firing on the
GR/CGR. Where this is the case, there is no requirement for the butt flag to be
used; however, when inspecting targets, the RCO must accompany personnel to
and from the butts, thereby personally ensuring that there is no one present in the
butts before weapons are loaded and firing commences.

PROTECT 4-11
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Words of Command

0455. Words of Command. The RCO is to ensure that all firers can hear his
words of command. A loudhailer or Public Address (PA) system may be used. The
conditions of the practice to be fired dictate the orders to be given. A guide to the
sequence is as follows:

a. “Next detail move onto the firing point”. Explain the practice details
then,

b. “Prone Position Down then Load”.

c. “Ready — test and adjust”.

d. “Coaches carry on” If this is not applicable, order “Anyone not ready”
and then give the executive order to permit firing, “One ring” (to the butts), or
indicate to the console operator to expose the targets.

e. When coaching the rifle and LSW coaches are not to adopt the same
position as the firer if within 2 metres of the weapon. This is due to the possibility
of being struck by an empty case.

f. At the end of the practice order “Anyone not finished” — “2 rings” (to the
butts in the case of a GR). “Unload” — “Stand up” — “for inspection port
arms”. Safety Supervisors raise their hand to show clear or weapons are
inspected by the RCO. Order “Ease Springs”.

g. “Details change” — “Listen to your scores”. Scores are to be sent back


from the butts by telephone and read out to the firers (on a GR). (It is usual for
scores to be read out on completion of each practice.)

h. The system for a CGR or ETR will vary slightly as scores are held in the
console and will be read out by the console operator after each practice. The
order to cancel scores is not to be given until the scores have been recorded on
the butt register.

Suspension of Firing

0456. Intrusion. If persons, vehicles, aircraft or shipping are seen to enter, or are
about to enter, the danger area, firing is to cease and safety catches are to be applied.
Further action is to be ordered, as appropriate, by the RCO. Range Control is to be
informed. Sentries, if posted, must be briefed to inform the RCO immediately should
an intrusion occur or is about to occur. Sentries are to be clearly instructed as to what
means they should use to contact the RCO. On completion of firing the RCO is to
record all details in the MoD Form 906.

4-12 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

0457. Aircraft International Warning Signal. All RCOs must be aware of the
international warning signal used to warn aircraft to exercise extreme caution. The
signal, which consists of a series of red and green pyrotechnic signals fired alternately,
is to be used to warn aircraft which appear to be entering the danger area concerned.
Range Orders will specify any other warning signals to be used, particularly on ranges
with a sea danger area. If required by Range Orders an individual from the user unit,
nominated to act as Air Sentry, is to warn the RCO as soon as an aircraft is seen in or
heading towards the RDA. The RCO is to order all cadets to stop firing and apply safety
catches immediately this warning is received. Firing is not to continue until the aircraft
has left the RDA. The RCO is to report the incursion to Range Control. (JSP 403
Volume 3 contains information on Signal Reporting Action for infringements of UK
Danger Areas.) Information regarding UK Army Air Danger Areas can be found in Land
Command Standing Order (LANDSO) 1403.

Safety Supervision

0458. For LFMT practices the ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is to be sufficient
to ensure the safe conduct of all practices. The ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is
to be recorded in the RASP.

0459. On all LFMT ranges the muzzle is to be kept pointing horizontally at the
target/stop butt during all weapon handling drills and whenever made ready whilst on
the firing point.

Inspections

0460. Normal Safety Precautions. Personnel are NOT permitted to stand in front
of weapons during safety precautions no matter where they are being conducted.

0461. Before Firing. The RCO or Safety Supervisors are to conduct a thorough
physical check of all ammunition, weapon chambers, magazines, ammunition
pouches, pockets and other personal clothing and equipment. This is to ensure that:

a. Weapons are clear.

b. No unauthorised ammunition is present.

c. Firers have issued, serviceable hearing protection.

0462. During Firing. Details of readiness states of weapons, when firers are
required to move during practices, are given in the conditions of the LF lessons
contained within Service manuals. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to
leave the firing point or to move forward, ie to examine targets, then weapons are to
be unloaded and inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors before the order to
move is given by the RCO.

PROTECT 4-13
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

0463. After Firing. Before leaving the range, the RCO is to ensure that all empty
and re-conditioned ammunition containers, empty cases and salvage are collected
and live or blank rounds are segregated for return to store. The following are then
inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors:
a. All magazines and ammunition containers.
b. All weapons.
c. The firers personal equipment and clothing (particular attention being paid
to pockets and pouches).
d. A Certificate Free From Explosives (CFFE) signed by the RCO or a Safety
Supervisor is to be placed in each empty container.
0464. Declaration. In accordance with Regulations firers are to be reminded that
it is an offence to leave the range with live rounds, empty cases, pyrotechnics or parts
of pyrotechnics (as applicable). A declaration to that effect is to be given to the RCO
by all participants and all range staff. Anyone who is detailed to return ammunition to
store must be inspected after its return. A declaration is to be made on the conclusion
of each activity during which live or blank ammunition and/or pyrotechnics have been
issued. The AFB 159A must be signed on the completion of the above. CFAV and
cadets are to be reminded if any ammunition is found after they have given the
declaration, they are to hand it in to a member of staff.
0465. If a vehicle is used to transport ammunition before or during training it must be
checked to ensure there is no ammunition present at the completion of training. If the
vehicle is used to transport ammunition after training a complete check of the vehicle
must take place once the ammunition has been off-loaded to the store.

Ammunition
0466. Ammunition Issues. An ammunition issue point is to be established for all
LFMT activities. The following rules apply:
a. A NCO/CFAV must be appointed to be responsible for issuing and
accounting for ammunition. He must ensure that ammunition is not left
unattended. When issuing ammunition he is to:
(1) Record the BKI for every container opened.
(2) Only issue from one batch at a time. (This will make segregation
possible in the event of an incident).
(3) Only open containers immediately prior to issue. In the case of
cardboard cartons and plastic bags, they are not to be opened in
anticipation.
(4) Only issue ammunition in the quantities directed by the RCO.
(5) Cadets must never be made responsible for ammunition.

4-14 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

b Ammunition is only to be issued to those cadets and CFAV about to fire.


Once ammunition has been issued, cadets must be under the direct supervision
of a NCO or CFAV at all times.

c. On completion of firing, all unfired ammunition is to be returned to the


ammunition point. Empty cases are to be returned to a separate salvage point.

0467. Armour Piercing (AP) Ammunition. Due to the penetrative power of AP


ammunition which may result in structural damage to the range, the use of AP
ammunition is only permitted on Field Firing Areas (FFAs).

0468. Mixed Live and Blank. Normally only live ammunition will be taken onto
any firing range. If an occasion should arise when, because of the type of training
being carried out, it is necessary to take blank ammunition onto a firing range, the
following points must be strictly adhered to:

a. Live and blank ammunition are NEVER to be mixed.

b. There must be separate issuing points for live and blank ammunition, at
least 30 metres apart, each under control of a separate NCO or CFAV. The
procedures laid down in Chapter 3 are to be adhered to.

c. Cadets or CFAVs will not be issued with blank ammunition if they have live
ammunition in their possession, or vice versa. If a change in the type of
ammunition being used is necessary, training must be stopped, weapons
cleared and inspected (see Chapter 3 for information on blank ammunition and
pyrotechnics), ammunition withdrawn, equipment checked and a declaration
taken. The withdrawn ammunition must be immediately returned to its
respective issuing point and all open ammunition boxes must be checked by the
RCO to ensure that live and blank ammunition has not been mixed. This is to be
done before moving on to the next stage and before leaving the range.

0469. Blank. If blank ammunition is issued in any form other than in factory
sealed containers the RCO/ECO is to ensure that a thorough physical check is
carried out to ascertain that only blank ammunition is contained within. This includes
the need to thoroughly check ammunition issued in reconditioned, re-sealed
containers. Confirmation that containers are factory sealed and not reconditioned and
re-sealed by an ammunition inspectorate or locally by ammunition compound staff
must be sought from the issuing personnel.

0470. Drill Rounds. Drill rounds will not be taken on the range except for use in
stoppage practices or for coaching. In this instance the drill rounds will be taken to and
from the range under the orders of the RCO and their subsequent collection must be
carefully supervised.

0471. Damaged Rounds. It is important that any round, whether damaged or not,
which is involved in a stoppage or used as a tool, be removed from use. Such rounds

PROTECT 4-15
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

are not to be replaced in a belt or magazine, nor is any attempt to be made to fire
them. Damaged or rejected rounds are to be collected on the range and are to be
returned to the ammunition store separately from any other unfired ammunition.

0472. Performance Failures. Ammunition that fails to function as intended, when


fired (eg misfires) is to be reported to the ATO in accordance with Section 6 of Chapter
1.

0473. Defective Rounds. All rounds that are found to be defective in any way, eg
percussion cap missing, are to be reported to the ATO in accordance with Section 6 of
Chapter 1.

0474. Records. Immediately on return from the LFMT activity the completed AFB
159A and/or B Certificate is to be handed in to the ammunition store for any training
where LIVE, BLANK ammunition or pyrotechnics were issued. The AFG 8227 — Unit
Ammunition Issue Voucher is to be completed and handed in to the officer nominated
in unit standing orders. AFB 189 (if used) or other record of results is to be forwarded
to the unit office for entry on AFB 6997. An example of an AFB 159A and AFB 159B is
shown at Figs 3a and 3b.

Falling Plates

0475. The only falling plate practice that is permitted to be fired on ranges covered
in this chapter is that detailed in Reference C (Pamphlet No. 20, Competition
Shooting), Match 37.

0476. There are 2 types of falling plate available for use on LDA and FDA ranges.
They are:

a. Standard Falling Plate. Issued for use on a range where additional RDA is
available to cater for the increased likelihood of ricochets. Their use will be
authorised in Range Orders. The following specific conditions and limitations
apply:

(1) Falling plates may be positioned on the face of the stop butt of a LDA
range in shooting-in boxes (see Fig 4). To guard against ‘backsplash’ the
following rules are to apply:

(a) Where the distance from the plates on the face of the stop butt
to the Marker’s gallery is less than 50 metres, the markers must not
be permitted to remain in the open part of the gallery. Suitable
shelter would be the range workshop or store, provided the door is
closed and markers do not stand by any windows facing the plates.

(b) Where no suitable shelter is provided in the gallery or there is


no gallery, no one is to be forward of the firing point. Once weapons
are loaded and firers are completing the rundown everyone is to be

4-16 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

behind the firing line, unless they are positioned behind properly
constructed bulletproof cover.

(2) A link is to be established from the firing point to the marker’s location.

b. Falling Plate Boxes. Where Range Standing Orders do not allow for
standard, unprotected falling plates to be used on GR/CGR or ETR an
alternative, when firing 5.56 mm ball ammunition, is to use a prescribed falling
plate sleeve that completely encloses the falling plate and subsequently
captures the rounds that strike the plate thus eliminating the ricochet hazard
altogether. Provision of these sleeves and rules for the target positioning is the
responsibility of the RAU and will be promulgated in Range Standing Orders.
The following specific conditions and limitations apply:

(1) Positioning of Targets. On Gallery/Converted Gallery Ranges the


covered falling plate targets are to be located on top of the mantlet or on
the face of the stop butt (see Figs 4 and 5). The location and method of
positioning will be detailed in the Range Standing Orders.

(2) Markers’ Gallery. The Markers’ Gallery can be manned; however, all
personnel are to remain under cover of the gallery throughout firing.
Movement from and to the gallery is to be strictly controlled by the OIC
Butts.

(3) Inspection. It is the personal responsibility of the OIC Butts to


inspect each falling plate sleeve when re-setting the falling plates for the
next firing detail. Any reduction to the rigidity of the sleeve or any exposure
of the metal falling plate will render the cover unserviceable and
necessitate turning or replacement.

0477. Conduct. Unless specific instructions are given by the Technical Advisory
Section (TAS) to the contrary, the layout for falling plate practices is to conform to the
layout in Figs 4 and 5. Irrespective of the type of target/plate being used the following
rules apply to all falling plate shoots on GR/CGR and ETR:

a. Only 5.56 mm ball ammunition is to be fired.

b. Minimum firing distance is not less than 200 metres/yards.

c. A summary of the conditions from Reference C (Pamphlet No. 20,


Competition Shooting) for firing at falling plates is:

(1) On 10 and 12 lane ranges no more than 2 teams are to fire


simultaneously.

(2) On a 10 lane range only lanes 3-4 and lanes 7-8 are to be used (see
Fig 5).

PROTECT 4-17
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(3) On a 12 lane range only lanes 4-5 and lanes 8-9 are to be used (see
Fig 6).

(4) The outside edge of each pair of lanes is to be clearly marked to form
a firing line using shaped/coloured markers (see Figs 4 and 5).

(5) The outside edge of each row of plates is to be clearly marked using
shaped/coloured markers that correspond to those on the firing point (see
Figs 4 and 5).

(6) Each team must fire from their allotted firing line.

(7) Falling plates are to be positioned so that the fifth and sixth plate of
each group of ten are positioned either side of a Centre Line (CL) between
the pairs of lanes being used.

(8) Falling plates are to be positioned with approximately a 300 mm


spacing between each plate.

(9) Teams are not permitted to engage plates outside their allocated
lane, ie 4-5 or 8-9. To do so will result in cross lane firing that cannot be
catered for in the design of the range/RDA.

Hearing Protection

0478. The noise of discharge from service weapons can cause considerable
damage to unprotected ears. Whenever CFAV/cadets are engaged in firing Inf/Cadet
WS the wearing of issued, serviceable hearing protection is compulsory. This applies
to all military and civilian personnel. Checking for hearing protection is the
responsibility of the RCO and his Safety Supervisors, however, this does not absolve
firers of their personal responsibility to safeguard their own hearing.

Night Firing

0479. Under no circumstances are cadets or CFAV to conduct any form of Live
Firing Marksmanship Training at night.

0480 – 0483. Reserved.

4-18 PROTECT
PROTECT

Army Form B159A (Introduced 9/01) PPQ = 100

CERTIFICATE to be rendered after any training for which LIVE/BLANK ammunition or pyrotechnic was
issued
(vide Queen’s Regulations 1975 paragraph 5155)

I CERTIFY that before dismissing the troops training under my command on the .............................................

*for which LIVE/BLANK ammunition and/or pyrotechnic was issued, I personally ascertained that all
unexpended natures and empty cases were collected or otherwise accounted for.

*I inspected the vehicles and their crews and I personally ascertained that all unexpended natures and
empty cases were collected or otherwise accounted for.

I personally ensured that a thorough physical inspection of weapon chambers, magazines,


ammunition pouches, pockets, helmet linings and other personal clothing and equipment was
conducted on the soldiers on parade to ensure no ammunition remained and reminded them that it is a
Military Offence to have any LIVE/BLANK ammunition or pyrotechnics in their possession.

I ordered each individual to declare verbally at the time of the inspection whether he/she has any
ammunition or accountable components remaining in his/her possession.

Location ............................................... ..............................................................................


(Signature of Senior Range Conducting Officer/Range
Conducting Officer/Exercise Conducting Officer)

Date .....................................................

* Delete if not applicable Produced by MOD, DSDA(PC)Ky. Tel: 0117 9376256

Fig 3a. — Army Form B159A

PROTECT 4-19
PROTECT

Army Form B159B (Introduced 9/01) PPQ = 100

CERTIFICATE to be rendered when BLANK/PYROTECHNIC


and similar training ammunition is issued

I CERTIFY that I personally ensured that a thorough physical inspection of weapon chambers, magazines,
ammunition pouches, pockets, helmet linings and other personal clothing and equipment was conducted on
the soldiers on my parade on ..................................... before BLANK ammunition was issued, and that no LIVE
ammunition was found.

I reminded the soldiers that it is a Military Offence to have any LIVE ammunition in their possession.

I ordered each individual to declare verbally at the time of the inspection whether he/she has any ammunition
in his/her possession before BLANK ammunition was issued.

Location ............................................... .........................................................................


Signature of Range Conducting Officer/
Exercise Conducting Officer
Date .....................................................

Produced by MOD, DSDA(PC)Ky. Tel: 0117 9376256

Fig 3b. — Army Form B159B

4-20 PROTECT
C
L C
L
STOP BUTT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MANTLET

PROTECT
PROTECT

200m/yds
FIRING
POINT

Fig 4. — Layout of a 10 Lane Range for Falling Plates Showing the Position for
Unprotected Falling Plates on the Stop Butt

4-21
4-22
C
L C
L
STOP BUTT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MANTLET

PROTECT
PROTECT

200m/yds
FIRING
POINT

Fig 5. — Layout of a 12 Lane Range for Falling Plates Showing the Position for
Protected Falling Plates on the Mantlet
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 5. — CONDUCT OF LIVE FIRING WITH SERVICE WEAPONS


BY CIVILIANS AND CADETS

Introduction

0484. This section deals with the use of CONTENTS


Service weapons on all MOD ranges by
INTRODUCTION 4-23
civilians. The rules and procedures for the
use of MOD land ranges by organised USE OF SERVICE SMALL ARMS BY CIVILIANS 4-23
bodies such as the police, civilian clubs and
USE OF SERVICE SMALL ARMS BY CADETS 4-24
civilian contractors are contained in
Reference D (JSP 403 Volume 1).

Use of Service Weapons by Civilians

0485. A civilian may only use Service weapons and Service ammunition on MOD
property under the terms and conditions of the Armed Forces Act 1996, which states:

A person under the supervision of a member of the armed forces may,


without holding a certificate or obtaining the authority of the Secretary of
State under Section 5 of the Firearms Act 1968, have in his possession a
firearm and ammunition on service premises.

0486. Civilians, including MOD employed civilians may only have possession of
Service weapons, Service ammunition and Service pyrotechnics on MOD property
providing the following rules are adhered to:

a. They must be under the supervision of a member of the armed forces who
is on duty and competent to provide such supervision.

b. The activity for which they have been given possession is a formally
endorsed activity supervised and conducted by the Military, which has been
expressly authorised in writing by the Commanding Officer. The authorisation
must specify the following:

(1) The purpose of the activity.

(2) The resources required to conduct the activity.

(3) Personnel allocated to the activity and their specific responsibilities.

(4) The time and location of the activity.

PROTECT 4-23
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(5) The reason why the civilian is required to fire a service weapon.

0487. Commanders have a duty to ensure that those under their command, during
such activities, are entirely clear for the need to rigorously enforce the prohibition of
civilian access to Service weapons, ammunition and pyrotechnics without express
authority as outlined above.

0488. The following rules and procedures are to be enforced by the RCO:

a. The ratio of qualified safety supervisors to firers is to be 1:1.

b. The minimum age for civilians is 14 years of age.

c. Firing is not to take place at a distance greater than 25 m.

d. Firing is only permitted from a recognised firing position.

e. Automatic fire with live ammunition is prohibited.

f. All handling drills, including any stoppage drills, are to be completed by the
safety supervisor. The ‘Ready’ weapon is to be handed to the firer, who is only to
place the safety catch to ‘Fire’ and operate the trigger.

g. On completion of firing, the firer is to apply the safety catch to the ‘Safe’
position and the safety supervisor is to take control of the weapon.

h. The safety supervisor is to ensure that, at all times, the weapon is pointing
in a safe direction.

i. Civilians are not permitted to fire Service weapons at night.

j. Ensure the Safety Supervisor briefs the firer how and where to aim the
weapon.

k. Ensure that the firer is strong enough to handle and fire the weapon.

Note: Should there be a duty requirement for Cadets/CFAVs to fire service weapons
on which they are not formally trained and tested the rules outlined in Paras 0486 a
and 0486 b are to be adhered to. In particular, express written authority must be pro-
vided by the CO in accordance with Para 0486 b. The live firing of such weapons
does not constitute formal training and the firer will not be deemed competent.

Use of Service Small Arms by Cadet Forces

0489. All LFMT practices for Cadet Forces are to be conducted in strict accordance
with the following publications:

JSP 535 Cadet Training Safety Publications

4-24 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

AC 71462 Cadet Training Manual Volume 1

AC 71463 Cadet Training Manual Volume 2

AC 71294 Combined Cadet Force Training Syllabi

AC 71101 ACF Army Proficiency Certificate

ACP 18 Manual of Marksmanship Training

ACP 20A Air Cadet Training Instructions

ASCR T16 Sea Cadet Regulations

0490 – 04101. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-25
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

4-26 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 6. — AIR RIFLE RANGES

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-27
04102. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of DEFINITIONS 4-27
live firing on the Air Rifle Range. For rules
COST AND AVAILABILITY 4-27
regarding the use of air rifles on Indoor
Ranges see Section 7 of this chapter. It must RANGE DANGER AREA 4-27
be read in conjunction with the information
contained in Sections 2 to 4 of this chapter. ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-27

QUALIFICATIONS 4-27

Definitions PREPARATION AND TESTING 4-28

04103. Air rifles are defined as rifles which RESTRICTIONS 4-28


fire a lead pellet by the release of a spring CONDUCT 4-28
driven piston inside a sealed air chamber.
WEAPON SAFETY 4-29

Cost and Availability PERIMETER MARKING 4-29

CERTIFICATION/INSPECTION 4-29
04104. Advice on cost and type of air rifles
is available from the NSRA, Lord Roberts WEAPONS
House, Bisley Camp, Brookwood, Woking,
Surrey, GU24 0NP. The weapon types permitted for use on
the range are those that, due to the
pressures developed, do not require a
Range Danger Area Firearms Certificate.

04105. Details of the RDA for an outdoor air rifle range are contained at Fig 6 and in
Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2). Details of the RDA for any other type of Air Rifle
Range are to be sought through the Technical Advisory Section, RE, DTE Warminster.

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04106. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1,


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

Qualifications

04107. The following table specifies the minimum rank and qualification required by
personnel to conduct and participate in live firing training on the Air Rifle Range:

PROTECT 4-27
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Ser Appointment SA (07) Cadet Remarks


Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety (SR), (LR) (07) See Note.
Supervisor or (ARD)
3 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
4 Firer — 1. See Note.
2. When civilians, eg school children are
firing, all manipulative drills are to be
conducted by the Safety Supervisor who is
to provide complete supervision whilst the
firer is in possession of the weapon.

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to be competent in the handling of the air weapons
being fired.

Preparation and Testing

04108. The target apparatus must be set up and tested for correct functioning. Test
weapons for serviceability. All other applicable aspects of range preparation are to be
carried out.

Restrictions

04109. There must always be sufficient light available to allow the weapon sights to
be used as intended. Firing by sense of direction is forbidden.

04110. The propellant for this type of ammunition is produced by the weapon
mechanism. High powered air rifles (0.177 and 0.22 inch) which produce a pressure
greater than 11.5 ft/lbs or air pistols (0.177 and 0.22 inch) which produce a pressure
greater than 6 ft/lbs, require a Firearms Certificate before purchase and are not
catered for by the danger area or baffling quoted and are therefore NOT to be used on
Air Rifle Ranges for military training.

Conduct
04111. There is to be no lowering of the standard of range discipline and safety
when dealing with air rifles.

04112. Weapons are to be inspected before and after firing. If targets are to be
inspected (including ‘wind-in’ type), rifles are to be unloaded, inspected and placed
down. The breech is to be open. The conduct of practices and words of command are
to be the same as those used for LFMT practices.

4-28 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

04113. Outdoor Range. Particular care must be taken to ensure that no one is
about to enter the danger area (see Fig 6). The air rifle RDA is in Reference A (JSP
403 Volume 2).

04114. Ammunition. The RDA quoted is for 0.177 inch pellets fired from standard
design weapons developing less than the ME outlined in paragraph 04110.

04115. Targets. Representative targets for grouping, application of fire and fleeting
targets are to be constructed by the user. Some form of witness screen should be
provided behind the targets as an aid to rectifying shooting faults. The types of material
to be used for target construction are shown in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2).

Weapon Safety
04116. Weapon Drills. During all weapon handling drills, inspection drills, and
whenever made ready the barrel is to be kept pointing at the target area and horizontal
to the ground.

04117. Spacing. The extent of the firing point is to be determined by the need to
maintain a minimum distance of one metre between firers.

Perimeter Marking
04118. For ease of construction, particularly for units who are frequent users of this
type of range, pre-cut ropes to the exact lengths required can be used to mark the
boundaries of the RDA.

Certification/Inspection
04119. There is no requirement for portable/temporary Air Rifle Ranges to be
formally certified or inspected. The RCO is responsible for ensuring that the range is
safe by adhering to the rules and procedures contained in this section.

04120 – 04124. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-29
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

RDA FOR PORTABLE AIR RIFLE RANGES


The diagram shown here represents a 6-lane Air Rifle Range allowing one metre between firers.
This distance is the minimum acceptable but can be increased. The dimensions in this diagram
are only applicable to ranges established on a grassed area.

All dimensions in metres NOT TO SCALE


unless otherwise stated

30

RESTRICTIONS ON USE

1. Only for use with .177” Air Rifles with


a firing pressure of no greater than 11.5
ft/lbs.

2. Firing is only permitted from the


established firing point.
Direction of Fire

3. No fire and movement.


120
4. The target line is to be established at 10
metres forward of the firing point.

5. Minimum distance between firers is one


metre.

6. Target heights should reflect the firing


position used, thereby ensuring the weapons
remain approximately parallel to the ground.

Target Line

10
2.5 2.5

Firing Point
Note: It is the responsibility of the RCO to ensure that the perimeter of the RDA is marked with
sufficient clarity to ensure that it can be seen by anyone approaching and enabling the extent of
the RDA to be readily identified by the RCO. If the distances are paced out rather than measured
then a 20% margin of error must be added. For further information see paragraph 04118
Perimeter Marking.

Fig 6. — RDA for Portable Air Rifle Ranges

4-30 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 7. — THE TRAINING THEATRE AND INDOOR RIMFIRE


RANGES

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-31
04125. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-31
live firing in the Training Theatre Range and
ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-31
other indoor ranges. It must be read in
conjunction with the information contained in QUALIFICATIONS 4-32
Sections 2 to 4 of this chapter.
ACTIONS BY RCO 4-32

TESTING 4-33
Range Danger Area
RESTRICTIONS 4-33
04126. This range is designed to provide
all weather facilities. The design ensures CONDUCT 4-33
complete confinement of all fired rounds WEAPON SAFETY 4-34
within the range, coupled with the
elimination of ‘backsplash’ and ricochet
hazards to persons within the range. WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
The ammunition natures and weapon
04127. Descriptions of the ranges types permitted for use on the range
together with details of targetry available are will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
contained in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume
2). Full details are contained in the following Type Drawings from Technical Advisory
Section, RE, DTE Warminster:

a. MOD Type Drawing No. 55729/2 Indoor Training Theatre.

b. MOD Type Drawing No. 55735/2 25 metre Indoor Range.

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04128. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

PROTECT 4-31
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Qualifications

04129. The following table specifies the minimum rank and qualification required by
personnel to conduct and participate in live firing training in the Training Theatre and
Indoor Ranges:
Ser Appointment SA (07) Cadet Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note.
(ARD)
3 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
4 Firer See Note.

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

Actions by RCO
04130. The RCO must complete the following actions:
a. Read Range Orders.
b. Check the condition of bullet catcher and/or anti-splash curtain. The metal
plate must not be exposed.
c. Check access to the range.
d. Check security of weapons and ammunition.
e. Check target availability and method of setting up.
f. Check the serviceability of cine target equipment. Films to be used should
be viewed if the RCO is not familiar with them.
g. Check the functioning of the lighting systems including infra-red (IR).
h. Check heating arrangements.
i. Check the waiting area provided for non-firing personnel.
j. Check the serviceability of all security aspects of the range including red
warning lights, external warning signs at range access doors and the internal
method of securing all doors.

4-32 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

k. Check the serviceability and operation of the ventilation system. The RCO
must ensure he adheres to the rules and guidelines contained in Range Orders.
l. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate parts of the MOD Form 906
prior to firing.

m. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This must be done on
completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves the range.

Testing

04131. The testing of apparatus within the range will be dependent on the facilities,
from a minimum equipped 25 metre small bore range to the full scope of the training
theatre. A final check, in addition to preparation checks, may be required at this stage.
In addition allow time for the following:

a. The 0.22 inch conversion kits to be zeroed.

b. Optic sights are to be boresighted or zeroed.

Restrictions
04132. 5.56 mm centrefire round is NOT under any circumstances, to be fired in
indoor ranges or training theatres. Bullet catchers are not designed to stop anything
greater than those natures listed on the MOD Form 904 for the range. If used,
penetration of the rear wall could occur and firers could be in serious danger of injury
from backsplash or ricochet.

04133. 0.22 inch tracer ammunition is NOT to be fired in the Indoor Range or
Training Theatre.

04134. Air rifles are not to be fired against Linatex curtains because of the danger of
‘backsplash’.

Conduct
04135. Only the RCO, Safety Supervisors/coaches and firers are allowed on the
firing point.

04136. No one is to go forward to the targets until all weapons have been unloaded
and inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors/coaches, and permission to go
forward has been given by the RCO.

04137. Ammunition. The type of ammunition to be fired in the indoor range or


training theatre will be stated on the MOD Form 904.

PROTECT 4-33
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

04138. Targets. Apparatus and targets are described in Reference A (JSP 403
Volume 2).

04139. Target Spacing. Minimum spacing of targets from centre to centre is to be


twice the width of the largest target to be used.

Weapon Safety

04140. The following weapons are permitted:

a. Rifles Using 0.22 inch Conversion Kit. When weapons are fitted with the
conversion kit 5.56 mm L85 Rifles/L86 LSW and L98 Cadet Rifles are not to be
fired from the left shoulder. Due to the blowback action, when weapons are
fitted with the conversion kit, coaching is to be carried out from the firer’s left side
only.

b. Bolt Action Rifle 0.22 inch Calibre.

c. Air Rifle (0.177 or 0.22 inch). Indoor ranges used for air rifle shooting
require an essential modification to ensure that the anti-splash curtain or the
bullet catcher does not cause the pellet to bounce back. The anti-splash curtain
must be removed or a separate pellet stop set up in front of the anti-splash
curtain. Details of pellet stop materials are contained in Reference A (JSP 403
Volume 2).

d. Competition Rifles. Restricted to ammunition natures as previously


described.

04141. The minimum spacing between firers when firing the rifle is 1.0 metres.

04142. During all weapon handling drills, inspection drills, and whenever made
ready weapons are to be held parallel to the ground, pointing in the direction of the
target/bullet catcher.

04143. Bolt Action Weapons — Handling. Whenever weapons are not in use the
bolt must be open. Before attempting to close the bolt of the Bolt Action Weapon each
round must be hand fed into the chamber until resistance is felt. Failure to do this could
result in the rim of the 0.22 inch cartridge being struck by the extractor with sufficient
force to cause a premature initiation and possible injury to the firer and or coach.

04144. Misfires. Accidents have occurred as a result of re-firing 0.22 inch rimfire
cartridges which have previously misfired. The rim is liable to become damaged
during extraction and if the cartridge is reloaded and fired, it may fracture and cause
injury to the firer. To prevent such accidents, misfired or unfired cartridges which
prove difficult to extract must not be reloaded but are to be set aside and reported in
accordance with Section 6 of Chapter 1.

4-34 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

04145. Bulged Barrels. To minimise the risk of bulged barrels occurring:

a. The bores of 0.22 inch rifles are to be inspected:

(1) Before and on conclusion of firing.

(2) Whenever the noise made by the explosion of the charge is


noticeably different than usual.

(3) Whenever the bullet does not appear to have reached the target or
butt area.

b. If excessive fouling is noticed, the bore must be thoroughly cleaned and


inspected before firing is resumed. This should only be done by an armourer to
ensure that damage to the bore is not caused by misuse of the cleaning rod.

c. In the event of a bullet becoming lodged in the bore, units are to:

(1) Withdraw the rest of the batch of ammunition and put it aside for
inspection by an ATO.

(2) Report the incident as a performance failure in accordance with


Section 6 of Chapter 1.

04146 – 04152. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-35
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 8. — MOBILE AND PORTABLE RANGES


(RIMFIRE)

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-36
04153. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-36
live firing on the Mobile and Portable
ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-37
Ranges. It must be read in conjunction with
the information contained in Sections 2 to 4 QUALIFICATIONS 4-37
of this chapter.
ACTIONS BY RCO 4-37
04154. Mobile and portable ranges are RESTRICTIONS 4-36
improvised facilities. They can meet the
need for air rifle and service rimfire shooting CONDUCT 4-37
in non-permanent locations. They are
WEAPON SAFETY 4-39
suitable for use at shows and recruiting
displays and limited LFMT practices. WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
04155. A centrefire version has been The ammunition natures and weapon
designed, but any proposal for such a range types permitted for use on the range
is to be submitted to the 2 Star level of will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
command in accordance with current
procedure. The Range Authorising Officer (RAO) should consult the Technical
Advisory Section RE, DTE Warminster.

Range Danger Area

04156. The danger area, range layout and target details, together with a description
of the range are contained in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2).

04157. The design caters for the confinement of all rounds fired within a tube or
between the sides of a vehicle. A suitable bullet catcher is erected to stop the round
and other measures are taken to prevent rounds ricocheting or splashing back from
the range structure.

04158. The mobile range is vehicle mounted and easily moved between locations.
The portable range components are larger and although portable the design is
intended for a more permanent site than the mobile range. The ranges are described
and illustrated in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2).

04159. As the range has no permanent location the responsibility for the range and
therefore the production of Range Orders, rests with the unit or sub-unit that has the
range on charge. The RCO is to be in possession of a copy of the Range Orders.

4-36 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04160. All accidents, incidents and Defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1,


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

Qualifications

04161. The following table specifies the minimum qualification required by personnel
to conduct and participate in live firing training on Mobile and Portable Ranges:
Ser Appointment SA (07) Cadet Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note.
Supervisor (ARD)
3 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
4 Firer — 1. See Note.
2. The rules for civilians firing weapons
is at Section 5 of this Chapter.

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

Actions by RCO

04162. The RCO must complete the following actions:

a. Read Range Orders.

b. If the range is not permanently sited allow sufficient time for setting up and
the comprehensive testing of the equipment. Points to check are:

(1) Location and availability of the red ‘range in use’ flag.

(2) The siting should take into account not only the permanent features
of the area but also the intended concurrent activity.

(3) Access to the agreed site, particularly if other activities are to be set up.

(4) The positioning of the bullet catcher and firing platforms must be firm.

(5) Testing the target apparatus.

PROTECT 4-37
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(6) Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate part of the MOD Form
906 — Land Range Log, prior to use.

(7) Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This must be
done on completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves
the range.

c. Provision must be made to prevent the public from positioning themselves


deliberately or accidentally in front of the firing point. For ease of control the
firing point should be roped off.

d. Check the location of the nearest medical support. Minimum medical


support in accordance with the rules contained in Section 4 of Chapter 1 must
be adhered to.

Restrictions

04163. The siting of either type of range on other than MOD land, particularly if the
public are to be invited to use it, must be referred to the local police for their
agreement.

04164. When these ranges are to be used in a public place, consideration should be
given to using 0.177 inch air rifles instead of 0.22 inch rimfire weapons. The added
value of the rimfire nature must be set against the possible problems of siting and
obtaining local agreement from the civil police.

Conduct

04165. The rules of conduct set out in Section 7 of this chapter, for the indoor rimfire
range are to be applied. Additional specific rules are set out in the following paragraphs.

04166. Close supervision of the firer is necessary. If they are a member of the
public the rules at Section 5 of this chapter are to be complied with. In addition:

a. Brief the firer and determine their familiarity, if any, with the weapon.

b. Ensure that the weapon is held firmly before allowing firing to take place.

c. During aiming check on the direction of the muzzle.

d. Weapons are to be inspected before and after firing. If targets are to be


inspected (including ‘wind-in’ type) no move to inspect them is to take place until
all weapons have been inspected by the range safety staff and laid down with
the breech open.

4-38 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

e. The conduct of practices and words of command are to be the same as


those used for other LFMT practices.

04167. Firers. Ensure that:

a. No more than two firers are on the firing point at any one time.

b. Firers are only to engage targets immediately to their front. Firing across
target lanes is not allowed.

04168. Ammunition. The type of ammunition to be fired on the range will be


stated on the MOD Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued to the firer immediately
prior to loading. The remainder is to be retained by the RCO or NCO/CFAV IC the
ammunition point (see Section 4 to this chapter).

04169. Targets. Only standard issue static targets are to be used. No metal
targets are permitted. Targets are to be positioned centrally within the bullet catcher
area.

Weapon Safety

04170. The weapons permitted for firing on the range will be stated on the MOD
Form 904.

04171. The muzzle of the weapon is to be kept pointing at the target or kept inside
the tube (portable and extended mobile ranges) during all weapon handling drills and
whenever made ready.

04172. Privately owned weapons are not to be fired on either type of range.

04173. The firing position must be such that both elbows are rested on the firm
surface of the firing point during all firing.

04174 – 04178. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-39
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 9. — TUBE AND ENCLOSED RANGES

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-40
04179. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-40
live firing on the Tube and Enclosed Ranges.
It must be read in conjunction with the ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-40

information contained in Sections 2 to 4 of QUALIFICATIONS 4-41


this chapter.
ACTIONS BY RCO 4-41

RESTRICTIONS 4-42
Range Danger Area
CONDUCT 4-42
04180. The danger area, range layout and
target details, together with a description of WEAPON SAFETY 4-43
the range are contained in Reference A (JSP
403 Volume 2). Detailed drawings are WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
available from The Technical Advisory
Section (TAS) RE, DTE Warminster. The ammunition natures and weapon
types permitted for use on the range
04181. This range is designed to provide will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
all weather facilities. The design ensures
complete confinement of all fired rounds within the range, coupled with the elimination
of ‘backsplash’ and ricochet hazards to persons within the range.

04182. A typical example of the types of range is described and illustrated in


Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2).

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04183. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1,


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

4-40 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Qualifications

04184. The following table specifies the minimum qualification required to conduct
and participate in live firing training in a Tube or Enclosed Range:
Ser Appointment SA (07) Cadet Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note.
(ARD)
3 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
4 Firer — See Note.

Notes: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

Actions by RCO

04185. The RCO must complete the following actions:

a. Read Range Orders.

b. Ensure external red warning lights at firing point and bullet catcher access
doors are working.

c. Ensure serviceability of the safe access to firing point and bullet catcher.

d. Check the possible need for a sentry, particularly above ground, at the
entrance to an enclosed range.

e. Ensure serviceability of the bullet catcher. Particularly the profile of the


sand if this is in use as a stop butt. The metal plate must not be exposed.

f. Check the target apparatus, particularly methods of mounting and


operating swivel or snap targets.

g. Check ventilation system. The RCO must ensure he adheres to the rules
and guidelines contained in Range Orders.

h. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate part of the MOD Form 906 —
Land Range Log, prior to use.
i. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This must be done on
completion of training and in any case when the RCO leaves the range.

PROTECT 4-41
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Restrictions
04186. Firing by sense of direction is forbidden.
04187. Tracer ammunition is not to be used.
04188. Automatic fire is not permitted. Tube and enclosed ranges are not designed
to accommodate automatic fire.
04189. The only firing position to be used is prone.
04190. The lighting, whether artificial or daylight, must be sufficient to allow the
sighting system on the weapon to be used.

Conduct
04191. The design features of the range allow for one firer per tube. Only those
firers, the Safety Supervisors/coaches and the RCO are to be on the firing point. It is
stressed that all such personnel are to wear issued, serviceable hearing protection.
04192. The RCO must be able to control access to the bullet catcher. Weapons
must be unloaded and inspected before the order to examine or change targets is
given.
04193. Weapons must be boresighted or collimated before firing on the range.
04194. Care must be taken to ensure that firers are properly cleared, their weapons,
magazines and pouches checked and a declaration taken (see the ‘Inspection’
paragraph in Section 4 of this chapter) before they leave the range.
04195. Ammunition. Ammunition natures permitted for use on the range will be
shown on the MOD Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued immediately prior to
use. Waiting details are NOT to be in possession of ammunition.
04196. Targets. Standard issue targets for use on the 25 metre or indoor range
may be used, together with any suitable zeroing target. A snap, swivel or wind-in
feature may be incorporated. The following points are to be noted:
a. No form of metal target is to be used.
b. Target centres are to be adjusted so that they coincide with the centre of the
tube.
c. No form of moving target is permitted.

d. Any metal part of the target apparatus exposed to direct fire is to be


protected by adequate baffles.

4-42 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Weapon Safety

04197. The weapons that may be fired on the range will be shown on the MOD Form
904.

04198. The weapon muzzle is to be kept inside the tube at all times during all weapon
handling drills and whenever made ready. A white band is painted 150 mm inside the
tube to assist range staff in enforcing this rule.

04199 – 04204. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-43
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 10. — THE 1908 DESIGN BARRACK RANGE

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-44
04205. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-44
live firing on the 1908 Design Barrack
ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-44
Range. It must be read in conjunction with
the information contained in Sections 2 to 4 QUALIFICATIONS 4-45
of this chapter.
ACTIONS BY RCO 4-45

TESTING 4-46
Range Danger Area
RESTRICTIONS 4-46
04206. The 1908 Design Barrack Range is
a NDA range, if provided with a canopy over CONDUCT 4-46
the sand bullet catcher. Without the canopy WEAPON SAFETY 4-47
fitted it is a LDA range with a 100 metre
radius danger area imposed from each flank WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
target, around the rear of the stop butt wall,
which must be clear of all personnel. Any The ammunition natures and weapon
buildings within the LDA must also be types permitted for use on the range
cleared of personnel when the range is in will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
use. A description of the range and targetry
available is contained in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2). Full details are contained
in MOD Type Drawing No. 55702/1 available from the Technical Advisory Section,
(TAS) RE, DTE Warminster.

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04207. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

4-44 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Qualifications

04208. The following table specifies the minimum qualification required by


personnel to conduct and participate in LFMT on the 1908 Design Barrack Range:
Ser Appointment SA (07) Cadet Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note.
(ARD)
3 Target Operator None
4 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
5 Firer — See Note.

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

Actions by RCO

04209. The RCO must complete the following actions:

a. Read Range Orders.

b. Check that the bullet catcher sand is stacked to the authorised profile as
indicated by the white lines painted on the flanking walls of the bullet catcher,
and is free of ricochet inducing material.

c. Check that the target slots, target trenches, swivel targets or other snap
apparatus are in good repair.

d. Check that the firing points and trenches are in good repair.

e. Check that the area between the firing points and the stop butt wall within firing
lanes is clear of ricochet inducing material which will make the range unsafe to use.

f. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate parts of the MOD Form 906 —
Land Range Log prior to firing.

g. Ensure that the range in use flag is displayed in accordance with Range
Orders.

h. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This MUST be done

PROTECT 4-45
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

on completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves the range.

Testing
04210. Before firing is permitted, sufficient time must be allowed for testing the
following points:
a. Swivel target or other snap apparatus.
b. All sighting systems are to be boresighted to the weapon if not previously
zeroed.

Firing Point/Range
Serial Weapon Bursts Remarks
25m 20m – 10m
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Rifles 4 — —

2 LSW 4 — 3-5 rds See Burst Fire

3 Rifle 0.22 inch 4 4 — Rimfire


including conversion kits ammunition

Restrictions
04211. Unless otherwise stated in Range Orders the maximum number of weapons
allowed at each distance are:
04212. Minimum Range. Because of the danger of ‘backsplash’ the minimum
range for rifles and LSW is 25 metres. For rifle fitted with 0.22 inch conversion kit, the
minimum range is 10 metres. The table above gives the number of firers permitted.
04213. Sense of Direction. The firing of any weapon by sense of direction is
forbidden as is the firing of rifle and LSW, from the hip or waist.
04214. Burst Fire. Firing bursts with the rifle is forbidden. Burst fire is only
permitted with bipod or tripod supported weapons.
04215. Air Rifles. Air rifles are not to be used on 25 metre ranges.
04216. Ammunition. The type of ammunition to be fired on the range will be
stated on the MOD Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued to details waiting to
fire. Firers engaged in concurrent activity are NOT to have any live ammunition in
their possession. Tracer ammunition is not to be fired.
04217. For LFMT practices, the ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is to be sufficient
to ensure the safe conduct of all practices. The ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is
to be recorded in the RASP.

4-46 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Conduct
04218. For LFMT practices, the ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is to be sufficient
to ensure the safe conduct of all practices. The ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is to
be recorded in the RASP.
04219. Only firers, Safety Supervisors/coaches, the RCO and his assistants are
allowed on the firing point. Waiting details must be at least 3 metres from the firing
point or in the shelters provided. During the firing of rifle and LSW practices, the RCO
may make special arrangements to call up those waiting to fire, to a position from which
they can hear the instruction and advice, but they must be clear of the firing point.
04220. No one is to go forward to the targets until all weapons have been unloaded
and inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors/coaches, and permission has
been given by the RCO. All personnel are to move to the targets along the flank paths
or use the steps out of the ricochet pit.
04221. Firing is NOT permitted from the 30 yard firing point. Practices involving the
advance of firers from the 25 metre firing point, using low velocity and rimfire
ammunition, is not permissible.
04222. Static Targets. The following rules are to be applied:
a. Targets are to be positioned in the target trench or the slot provided.
b. Metal plates or other hard objects are not to be used as targets.
c. The aiming marks of flank targets and target screens must be at least 1.65
metres from either end of the bullet catcher.

Weapon Safety
04223. Weapon Drills. During all weapon handling drills and whenever made ready,
weapons are to be held parallel to the ground, pointing in the direction of the bullet catcher.
04224. 0.22 inch Conversion Kit. Due to the blowback action, when weapons
are fitted with the conversion kit, coaching is to be carried out from the left side only.
04225. After Firing. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to leave the
firing point or to move forward, ie to examine targets, then weapons are to be
unloaded and inspected before the order to move is given by the RCO.
04226. Ammunition. Magazines are to contain the precise number of rounds for
the practice to be fired. The ammunition is to be issued on the firing point and a CFAV
is to be appointed to supervise and account for it.
04226. Weapon Inspection. At the end of a practice and on completion of firing,
weapons are to be inspected by the Safety Supervisor while the firers remain in the
firing position.
04227. – 04236. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-47
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 11. — THE 25 METRE BARRACK RANGE

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-48
04237. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-48
live firing on the 25 metre Barrack Range. It
ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-48
must be read in conjunction with the
information contained in Sections 2 to 4 of RULES FOR USE 4-48
this chapter.
QUALIFICATIONS 4-49

ACTIONS BY RCO 4-49


Range Danger Area
TESTING 4-50
04238. The 25 metre Barrack Range is a
‘No Danger Area’ range and the stop butt RESTRICTIONS 4-50
wall and flank walls provide the limit of the CONDUCT 4-51
range danger area. A description of the
range and details of the targetry available is WEAPON SAFETY 4-51
contained in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume
WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
2). Full details are available from Technical
Advisory Section, (TAS) RE, DTE The ammunition natures and weapon
Warminster. types permitted for use on the range
will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04239. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

Rules for Use

04240. Except where stated in this section, the rules contained in Section 10 — The
1908 design Barrack Range are to be enforced on this range. The RCO is to complete
MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log prior to and on completion of firing.

4-48 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Qualifications

04241 . The following table specifies the qualification required to conduct and
participate in live firing training on the 25 metre Barrack Range:
SA (07) Cadet
Ser Appointment Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note.
(ARD)
3 Target Operator None
4 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
5 Firer — See Note.

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

Actions by RCO

04242. The RCO must complete the following actions:

a. Read Range Orders.

b. Check that the bullet catcher sand is stacked to the authorised profile as
indicated by the white lines painted on the flanking walls of the bullet catcher,
and is free of ricochet inducing material.

c. Check that the target slots and target trenches are in good repair.

d. Check that the firing points and trenches are in good repair.

e. Check that the area between the firing points and the stop butt wall within
firing lanes is clear of ricochet inducing material which will make the range
unsafe to use.

f. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate parts of the MOD Form 906 —
Land Range Log prior to firing.

g. Ensure that the range in use flag is displayed in accordance with Range
Orders.

h. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This MUST be done
on completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves the range.

PROTECT 4-49
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Testing

04243. Before firing is permitted, sufficient time must be allowed for testing the
following points:

a. Swivel target or other snap apparatus.

b. Optic sights are to be boresighted if not previously zeroed.

Restrictions

04244. Unless otherwise stated in range orders the maximum number of weapons
allowed at each distance are:
Firing Point/Range
Serial Weapon Bursts Remarks
25m 20m – 10m
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Rifles 6 — —

2 LSW 6 — 3-5 rds See Burst Fire

3 Rifle 0.22 inch 6 6 — Rimfire


including conversion kits ammunition

Note: The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.

04245. Minimum Range. Because of the danger of ‘backsplash’ the minimum


range for rifle and LSW is 25 metres. For the rifle fitted with 0.22 inch conversion kit,
the minimum range is 10 metres. The table above gives the number of firers
permitted.

04246. Sense of Direction. The firing of any weapon by sense of direction is


forbidden as is the firing of rifle and LSW, from the hip or waist.

04247. Burst Fire. Firing bursts with the rifle is forbidden. Burst fire is only
permitted with bipod or tripod supported weapons.

04248. Air Rifles. Air rifles are not to be used on this range.

04249. Ammunition. The type of ammunition to be fired on the range will be


stated on the MOD Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued to details waiting to
fire. Firers engaged in concurrent activity are NOT to have any live ammunition in
their possession. Tracer ammunition is not to be fired.

4-50 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Conduct
04250. The conduct for firing on this range is as follows:
a. Inspection of Targets. No one is to go forward to the targets until all
weapons have been inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors and
permission has been given by the RCO. All personnel are to move to the targets
along the flank path.
b. Static Targets. Targets are to be positioned in the target apparatus
provided. Metal plates or other hard objects are not to be used as targets.
04251. The face profile of the sand bullet catcher must be maintained at all times. If
the sand becomes displaced during firing, especially at the MPI, the practice must be
stopped, and the sand bullet catcher raked to the correct profile before firing continues.

Weapon Safety
04252. Weapon Drills. During all weapon handling drills and whenever made ready,
weapons are to be held parallel to the ground, pointing in the direction of the bullet catcher.
04253. 0.22 inch Conversion Kit. Due to the blowback action, when weapons
are fitted with the conversion kit, coaching is to be carried out from the left side only.
04254. After Firing. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to leave the firing
point or to move forward, ie to examine targets, then weapons are to be unloaded and
inspected before the order to move is given by the RCO.
04255. Ammunition. Magazines are to contain the precise number of rounds for
the practice to be fired. The ammunition is to be issued on the firing point and a CFAV
is to be appointed to supervise and account for it.
04255. Weapon Inspection. At the end of a practice and on completion of firing,
weapons are to be inspected by the Safety Supervisor while the firers remain in the
firing position.
04256. – 04265. Reserved.

PROTECT 4-51
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 12. — THE GALLERY RANGE (GR) AND


CONVERTED GALLERY RANGE (CGR)

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 4-52
04266. This section details the safety rules
RANGE DANGER AREA 4-52
and procedures that govern the conduct of
live firing on the Gallery Range (GR) or FALLING PLATE TARGETS 4-52

Converted Gallery Range (CGR). It must be ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-52
read in conjunction with the information QUALIFICATIONS 4-53
contained in Sections 2 to 4 of this chapter.
ACTIONS BY RCO 4-53

TESTING 4-54
Range Danger Area RESTRICTIONS 4-55

04267. The danger area, range layout and CONDUCT 4-55


target details, together with a description of GALLERY RANGE (CONTROL OF THE
the range and its accessories are contained BUTTS AND MARKERS GALLERY) 4-56

in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2). CONVERTED GALLERY RANGE


(CONTROL OF THE CONSOLE) 4-58
04268. For reasons of safety and for AMMUNITION 4-59
standardisation of drills, weapons are to be WEAPON SAFETY 4-60
cleared with the barrel parallel to the ground
and pointing at the butt/target area. WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
The ammunition natures and weapon
Falling Plate Targets types permitted for use on the range
will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
04269. Rules relating to the use of falling
plate targets are found at Section 4 to this chapter.

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04270. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1,


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

4-52 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Qualifications

04271. The following table specifies the minimum rank and qualification required by
personnel to conduct and participate in live firing training on the GR or CGR:
SA (07) Cadet
Ser Appointment Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (LR) (07) See Note1.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) See Note 1.
and (ARD)
3 OIC Butts/Console (SR), (LR) (07) See Note 2.
and (ARD)
4 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
5 Telephone Orderly None
6 Firer — See Note 1.

Notes:
1. The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.
2. If AMS is fitted and is to be used the OIC Console must hold Spec Qual 2861 or
be qualified to use AMS.

Actions by RCO
04272. The RCO must complete the following actions:
a. Read Range Orders.
b. Check the condition of the stop butt.
c. Check the condition of the mantlet, especially the profile board.
d. Check the availability of trenches and firing posts where specified at the
required firing points.
e. Check for access by vehicle to the marker’s gallery and access from the
target store to the gallery.
f. Check the serviceability of target mechanisms/frames.
g. Establish responsibility for and location of all range boundary flags, sentries
and barriers. Air sentries may be required if firing 7.62 mm ammunition.
h. Confirm firing hours.

PROTECT 4-53
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

i. If installed, check the AMS Console and Firing Point monitors.


j. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate parts of the MOD Form 906 —
Land Range Log, prior to firing.

k. Ensure that the range in use flag/lamp is displayed in accordance with


Range Orders.

l. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This must be done on
completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves the range.

04273. The range must no be used if there is any exposed ricochet inducing surface
between the firing points to be used and the stop butt.

Testing

04274. Gallery Range. Good range organisation is important. On a GR efficient


procedure in the butts can add considerably to the success of the day’s firing. The
butt party should arrive in sufficient time to be briefed and practiced. The following
points are to be covered:

a. Read out relevant safety rules to markers.

b. Ideally detail two cadets/CFAV per frame. The RCO is to ensure that the
cadets are fully briefed on the correct procedures when using the Frames.

c. Prepare and issue targets and butt stores to each lane in use. Two cadets
are to carry the 1.220 metre or 1.830 metre targets.

d. Test the target frames that are to be used.

e. Check targets for correct marking of scoring areas. Patch out any shot
holes.

f. Test communications, including any alternative systems.

g. Rehearse markers in their duties for each practice to be fired.

04275. Converted Gallery Range. The console operators should arrive early to
test the mechanisms and rehearse target exposures for each practice. Clearance
from the range warden is required before this test may be carried out. The following
should also be tested:

a. Communications.

b. AMS system (if applicable).

4-54 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

04276. Boundary Flags and Sentries. The personnel required for these tasks (if
applicable) are to be formally briefed on their orders and duties.

Restrictions

04277. The following restrictions for the use of the GR/CGR are to be adhered to:

a. The maximum permitted QE is 70 mils and must not be exceeded.


Therefore, firing must only take place on the recognised firing points, at targets
that are correctly positioned.

b. 7.62 mm tracer rounds may backsplash as far as the 100 metre/yard firing
point and ricochet up to 400 metres in any other direction. For this reason the
markers gallery is NOT to be manned when 7.62 mm tracer is being fired.

c. FETs. The Markers’ Gallery is to be clear of all personnel when the FETs
are being used. When a range is allocated to 2 separate units for split use
Range Orders are to be adhered to.

d. Automatic Fire. The following restrictions on automatic firing are to be


adhered to:

(1) Automatic fire using the bipod supported LSW is only permitted from
the prone or fire trench position.

(2) Automatic fire from unsupported shoulder controlled weapons is not


permitted on a GR/CGR with a standard LDA.

(3) Automatic fire by sense of direction is not allowed under any


circumstances.

04278. Reserved.

Conduct

04279. Before Firing. The following points are to be covered:

a. General Briefing. It is essential that firers receive a full safety brief and are
fully briefed on the range procedure, including detail number and target/lane
number.

b. Firing Point Briefing. Immediately prior to starting the practice firers are to
be briefed on:

(1) Reminder of lane/target number.

(2) Details of the practice including number of rounds to be fired.

PROTECT 4-55
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

(3) The wearing of issued, serviceable hearing protection.

c. Firing Point. No one is allowed on the firing point unless authorised by the
Range Conducting Officer.

d. Words of Command. The RCO is to ensure that all firers can hear his
words of command. A loudhailer or PA system may be used. The conditions of
the practice to be fired dictate the orders to be given and are contained within
the Service Manuals.

e. Telephone Communications. The following system is suggested for use:

(1) ‘One short ring’ — Butts to firing point indicates ready. Firing point
to butts indicates start exposure of targets.

(2) ‘Two short rings’ — Firing point to butts indicates check targets,
take scores and/or change targets.

(3) ‘One long ring’ — Caller wishes to speak.

f. Fire with Movement. Practices involving an advance, are to be controlled


by the RCO and Safety Supervisors, who are to move with the firers, control the
rate of advance and ensure safe weapon handling. Hand signals for the
exposure of targets are to be given in ample time for the relay of that signal to
the butts or console. At the end of the practice weapons are to be cleared before
firers are allowed to move back to the start line.

Gallery Range (Control of the Butts and Markers Gallery)

04280. The RCO. Only the RCO may order the OIC butts to raise or lower the butt
flag. Before ordering the butt flag to be lowered, the RCO must ensure that the entire
butt party is under cover. He must wait until the butt flag has been lowered before
giving the order to load. Before he orders the butt flag raised, he is to ensure that all
weapons are unloaded and cleared. If the red flag is raised in an emergency by the
butts, he is to order “Stop – Stop – Stop”. At this point supervision is required. When
the nature of the emergency has been ascertained and it is safe to do so, he will order
the unloading and inspection of weapons.

04281. Communications Failure. Should communications to the butts fail, it is


the duty of the RCO to make physical contact with the butts. During any period when
communications fail, butt markers are to remain under cover, until such time as
communications are re-established. Under no circumstances even in an emergency
when the butt flag has been raised may anyone leave the cover of the butts until this
contact has been made.

04282. Butt Markers. The duties of the butt markers will depend on the type of
practice to be fired. The following points should be noted:

4-56 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

a. Target Marking. When using frame held targets, markers are to stand
under the cover of the markers gallery facing the stop butt.

b. Grouping Practices. Where possible, one marker is to watch the stop butt
for strike, the other is to record the order of arrival of shots.

c. Deliberate Practices. One marker is to watch the stop butt for strike and to
determine the direction of a miss. The other signals the value of a hit or the
noted position of a miss (See Signalling paragraph for methods).

d. Timed Practices. The length of exposure is controlled by the OIC butts


using a stop watch. The targets must be exposed and still for the total length of
the nominated time.

(1) Frame Targets. At the end of an exposure the targets are to be


brought to at least the half mast position.

(2) Hand Held Targets. When hand held targets are used the following
procedure is to be applied:

(a) The front carriage is to be fully raised and secured.

(b) To expose a hand held target the marker is to stand immediately


in front of the target frame facing towards the stop butt.

(c) The hand held target is to be presented by raising the target pole
against the bar of the front target carriage until the target centre
coincides with that produced by a frame held target, thereby reducing
the need to adjust each target for height and direction.

(d) On some ranges a bar has been fitted across the gap between
adjacent frames. In such cases the same procedure is applied except
that the hand held target is placed against the bar rather than the
target carriage.

(e) It is likely that hand held targets will be issued pre-marked or


fitted with a wooden block to indicate correct target height when placed
against the front carriage.

(f) During practices with hand held targets a hit will be noticed by
the marker feeling the vibration in the target pole caused by the
bullet hitting the target.

PROTECT 4-57
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

04283. Signalling. Hits during practices with hand held targets are signalled at
the end of the practice with the aid of spotting discs. The issued marking paddle is
used to signal the value of shots during deliberate shooting. The method may be
varied provided that firers and markers are briefed and rehearsed. The suggested
method which conforms to competition marking is as follows:

a. 4 points scored - Paddle positioned at the bottom right corner of screen.

b. 2 points scored - Paddle positioned at the bottom of the screen.

c. 1 point scored - Paddle positioned at the bottom left corner of the screen.

d. Eash-out - Black face of paddle waved from side to side across the face of
the screen, then indicate the directionof the miss if known, using white side of
paddle.

04284. Scoring. The following procedure is to apply:

a. Targets will only be lowered on the command “Check” or “Down“ or on a


pre-arranged whistle signal. When targets have been lowered, the markers will,
in all cases, stand right away from their targets and will not touch them until the
OIC Butts has recorded the scores and given the order “Patch Out”. The value
of all shots is to be recorded in ink on the butt register. If a mistake is made, the
figure will be crossed out with a single thin line, the new figure written beside it
and the correction initialled by the OIC Butts.

b. After the order “Patch Out”, shot holes on the target will be marked off with
a pencil and patched out. The pencil marking will prevent a shot being counted
twice should a patch come off at any time.

c. If more hits are found on the target than should have been fired by one
individual or team, the firing point will be informed.

04285. Targets. The targets and accessories available on a GR/CGR are listed in
Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2). In addition the following points should be considered:

a. Front or Back Targets. One of these should be marked with a black cross
in the top corner to indicate to the firing point which target is being engaged.

b. White Patches. A patch 100 mm vertical x 75 mm lateral should be pasted


in the centre of targets used for zeroing. The bottom centre of the patch is to be
on the POA.

Converted Gallery Range (Control of the Console)

04286. Console Personnel. Rules for the console personnel are:

4-58 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

a. During practices, no one but the OIC console, the operators and/or
timekeepers are to be in the console building. Ammunition is not to be in the
building.

b. The signal to expose targets is given by the RCO on the firing point.

c. All timed exposures are to be controlled by use of the Electronic Automatic


Sequence Initiation (EASI) system or by timekeepers using a stop watch and
time chart.

d. Scores are to be recorded on the butt register as a total for each lane. They
are then read out over the PA system to the firers as individual hits per range,
and a total for the practice. Re-set buttons on the console are not to be operated
until the order “Cancel scores” is given by the RCO.

e. The OIC console is to watch for any sign of malfunction of the target or
console mechanisms. If this occurs the range warden is to be consulted and
firing stopped whilst the repair is undertaken. If this is not possible the affected
lane is to be taken out of use.

f. The console building is to be handed back to the range warden on the


completion of firing. He is responsible for closing down the range and noting
any malfunctions reported by the RCO or OIC console, which is also noted in
MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

04287. Control of Practices from 400 to 600 metres. A ‘range in use’ red flag is
normally hoisted on the pole provided above the console building. This flag is located
furthest from the console door and is to remain hoisted whilst firing is in progress at
any distance. When firing is to take place from the firing points behind the console
building, a second flag is required to be used as the ‘butt’ flag. This flag is located just
outside the console door and must be operated from cover. The following points are
to be complied with:

a. On orders from the RCO the console party are to lower the console building
butt flag and remain under cover.

b. Except in an emergency the console building butt flag is only to be raised on


orders from the RCO.

c. Communication to the console building is by means of a telephone or radio.


A telephone plug-in point is located on each firing point.

d. Any fire with movement practice is to be carefully controlled and supervised.


Control of target exposures must be planned and rehearsed, allowing sufficient
time for the relay and subsequent reaction to all signals.

04288. Targets. The standard target layout on a CGR is 2 FETs per lane, one
fitted with a Fig 11 and one fitted with a Fig 12.

PROTECT 4-59
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Ammunition

04289. The type of ammunition to be fired on the range will be stated on the MOD
Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued to details about to fire. Firers engaged in
concurrent activity, or butt markers, are NOT to have live ammunition in their
possession.

Weapon Safety

04290. Weapon Drills. During all weapon handling drills and whenever made
ready, the barrel is to be kept pointed horizontally at the target/stop butt.

04291. Cross Lane Firing. It is a condition of the shape of the GR/CGR danger
area that firers are confined to target lanes and that all firing takes place parallel to the
range axis. Therefore cross lane firing is prohibited except during falling plate
practices when fired in strict accordance with Section 4 of this chapter.

04292. The 200 Mils Rule. When a number of ranges are sited side by side this
rule may apply (see ‘200 mils rule’ paragraphs in Section 3 of this chapter). The range
orders will indicate the restrictions on each range. The RCO is to liaise with adjacent
ranges to determine the scope of the activity on those ranges.

04293. Movement. During movement between positions and during fire with
movement practices with rifle and LSW, the safety catch is to be applied.

04294. After Firing. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to leave the
firing point or to move forward, ie to examine targets, then weapons are to be
unloaded and inspected before the order to move is given by the RCO.

04295. Ammunition. Magazines are to contain the precise number of rounds for
the practice to be fired. The ammunition is to be issued on the firing point and a CFAV
is to be appointed to supervise and account for it.

04296. Weapon Inspection. At the end of a practice and on completion of firing,


weapons are to be inspected by the Safety Supervisor while the firers remain in the
firing position.

04297. – 04304. Reserved.

4-60 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

SECTION 13. — THE ELECTRIC TARGET RANGE (ETR)

CONTENTS
Introduction
INTRODUCTION 4-61
04305. This section details the safety rules
and procedures that govern the conduct of RANGE DANGER AREA 4-61
live firing on the ETR. It must be read in FALLING PLATE TARGETS 4-61
conjunction with the information contained in
Sections 2 to 4 of this chapter. ACCIDENTS, INCIDENTS AND DEFECTS 4-61

QUALIFICATIONS 4-62
Range Danger Area ACTIONS BY RCO 4-62

04306. The danger area, range layout and TESTING 4-63


target details together with a description of
RESTRICTIONS 4-63
the range are contained in Reference A (JSP
403 Volume 2). The grouping and zeroing CONDUCT 4-64
range associated with the ETR is assumed
to be an extension of the main range. The WEAPON SAFETY 4-65

conduct and safety rules for its use are not WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION
dealt with specifically.
The ammunition natures and weapon
types permitted for use on the range
Falling Plate Targets will be specified on the MOD Form 904.
04307. Rules relating to the use of falling plate targets are found at Section 4 to this
chapter.

Accidents, Incidents and Defects

04308. All accidents, incidents and defects, as described in Section 6 to Chapter 1,


are to be reported and then recorded in the MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

PROTECT 4-61
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Qualifications

04309. The following table specifies the minimum rank and qualification required by
personnel to conduct and participate in live firing training on the ETR:
SA (07) Cadet
Ser Appointment Remarks
Qualification
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 RCO (LR) (07) See Note 1.
2 Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or See Note 1.
(ARD)
3 OIC Console (LR) (07) or (ARD) See Note 2.
4 Ammo Orderly None NCO/CFAV
5 Firer — See Note 1.

Notes:
1. The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6
months.
2. If AMS is fitted and is to be used the OIC Console must hold Spec Qual 2861 or
be qualified to use AMS.

Actions by RCO

04310. The RCO must complete the following actions:

a. Read Range Orders.

b. Check the standard layout for targets. Any change in this layout requires
time to set up.

c. Check that the required EASI module for the practices to be fired is
available and that the EASI system is serviceable.

d. Triple target bars may be required for LSW firing. Check that they are
available and can be fitted.

e. Ensure that 2 cadets/CFAV carry and erect grouping and zeroing screens
required on the grouping and zeroing range.

f. Check trenches and firing posts, where specified, for availability and
serviceability.

g. Range Orders will specify which lanes and which firing points can be used.

h. Check that targets are visible to all intended firing positions.

4-62 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

i. Confirm firing hours and responsibility for positioning boundary flags,


sentries and barriers.
j. If installed, a check of the AMS Console and Firing Point monitors.
k. Sign on the range by filling in the appropriate parts of the MOD Form 906 —
Land Range Log, prior to firing.
l. Ensure that the range in use flag is displayed in accordance with Range
Orders.
m. Sign off the range by completing the MOD Form 906. This must be done
on completion of training and in any case before the RCO leaves the range.

Testing
04311. The console party, together with any required sentries or staff to put out
boundary flags, are to arrive in sufficient time to be briefed and practiced as
applicable. A rehearsal should include the following:
a. Check with the range warden that all target mechanism boxes are open
before any switches in the console building are operated.
b. Check that all lanes are functioning.
c. Check that the target layout is as requested and carry out a rehearsal of
target exposures and timings for the practices to be fired.
d. Test the PA system and other communications.
e. Test both AMS and EASI if available.

Restrictions
04312. The following restrictions for the use of the ETR are to be adhered to:
a. The maximum permitted QE is 150 mils and must not be exceeded.
Therefore, firing must only take place on the recognised firing point, at targets
that are correctly positioned.
c. Automatic Fire. The following restrictions on automatic firing are to be
adhered to:
(1) Automatic fire using a bipod/tripod supported weapon is only
permitted from the prone or fire trench position.
(2) Automatic fire by sense of direction is not allowed under any
circumstances.
(3) Range Orders must be consulted prior to use.

PROTECT 4-63
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Conduct

04313. Before Firing. The following points are to be covered:

a. General Briefing. It is essential that firers receive a full safety brief and are
fully briefed on the range procedures.

b. Firing Point Briefing. Immediately prior to starting the practice, firers are
to be briefed on:

(1) Reminder of lane/target number.

(2) Details of the practice including number of rounds to be fired (where


applicable).

(3) The wearing of issued, serviceable hearing protection.

c. Firing Point. No one is allowed on the firing point unless authorised by the
RCO.

d. Words of Command. The RCO is to ensure that all firers can hear his
words of command. A loudhailer or PA system is to be used. The conditions of
the practice to be fired dictate the orders to be given and are contained within
the endorsed Service Manuals.

e. Adjacent Range Use. The RCO is to consult Range Orders for details.

f. The RCO is NOT to conduct the practice from inside the console building.

h. Limit of Advance. The limit of advance permitted on the range is normally


125 meters forward of the main firing point. However, this may vary from range
to range. The RCO should consult Range Orders to find out the exact distance
firers are permitted to advance in front of the main firing point.

04314. Console Personnel. Rules for the console personnel are:

a. During practices no one but the OIC console, the operators and/or
timekeepers are to be in the console building. Ammunition is not to be in the
building.

b. The signal to expose targets is given by the RCO on the firing point.

c. All timed exposures are to be controlled by use of the EASI system or by


timekeepers using a stop watch and time chart.

d. Scores are to be recorded on the butt register as a total for each lane. They
are then read out over the PA system to the firers as individual hits per range,

4-64 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

and a total for the practice. Re-set buttons on the console are not to be operated
until the order “Cancel scores” is given by the RCO.

e. The OIC console is to watch for any sign of malfunction of the target or
console mechanisms. If this occurs the range warden is to be consulted and
firing stopped whilst the repair is undertaken. If this is not possible the affected
lane is to be taken out of use.

f. The console building is to be handed back to the range warden on the


completion of firing. He is responsible for closing down the range and noting
any malfunctions reported by the RCO or OIC console, which is also noted in the
MOD Form 906 — Land Range Log.

04315. Ammunition. The type of ammunition to be fired on the range will be


stated on the MOD Form 904. Ammunition is only to be issued to details about to fire.
Firers engaged in concurrent activity are NOT to have any live ammunition in their
possession.

04316. Targets. The targets and accessories available on an ETR are described
in Reference A (JSP 403 Volume 2). Detailed description of the FET mechanism is
contained in User Handbook for the Electrical Target Equipment, Fixed (Army Code
No. 14899).

04317. Zeroing. Initial grouping and zeroing can be carried out using AMS.
Where this facility is not provided, zeroing can be conducted using screens on the
adjacent Grouping and Zeroing Range or on the ETR. If grouping and zeroing
screens are used each must be carried and erected by 2 cadets or CFAVs.

04318. Control of Practices from 400 to 600 metres. A ‘range in use’ red flag is
normally hoisted on the pole provided above the console building. This flag is located
furthest from the console door and is to remain hoisted whilst firing is in progress at
any distance. When firing is to take place from the firing points behind the console
building, a second flag is required to be used as the ‘butt’ flag. This flag is located just
outside the console door and must be operated from cover. The following points are to
be complied with:

a. On orders from the RCO the console party are to lower the console building
butt flag and remain under cover.

b. Except in an emergency the console building butt flag is only to be raised on


orders from the RCO.

c. Communication to the console building is by means of telephone/radio. A


telephone plug-in point is located on each firing point.

d. Any fire with movement practice is to be carefully controlled and


supervised. Control of target exposures must be planned and rehearsed,
allowing sufficient time for the relay and subsequent reaction to all signals.

PROTECT 4-65
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Weapon Safety

04319. Weapon Drills. During all weapon handling drills and whenever made
ready, the barrel is to be kept pointed horizontally at the target.

04320. Cross Lane Firing. It is a condition of the shape of the ETR danger area
that firers are confined to target lanes and that all firing takes place parallel to the
range axis. Therefore cross lane firing is prohibited.

04321. Movement. During movement between positions and during fire with
movement practices with rifle and LSW the safety catch is to be applied.

04322. After Firing. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to leave the
firing point or to move forward, ie to examine targets, then weapons are to be
unloaded and inspected before the order to move is given by the RCO.

04323. Ammunition. Magazines are to contain the precise number of rounds for
the practice to be fired. The ammunition is to be issued on the firing point and a CFAV
is to be appointed to supervise and account for it.

04324. Weapon Inspection. At the end of a practice and on completion of firing,


weapons are to be inspected by the Safety Supervisor while the firers remain in the
firing position.

4-66 PROTECT
RESTRICTED Amdt 1/Apr/10

Annex A to
Chapter 4

THE HEADINGS CONTAINED IN THIS RANGE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN


(RASP) ARE AN EXAMPLE AND ONLY TO BE USED AS A GUIDE
FOR PLANNING

Your Reference Unit Address

Until Telephone Details

See Distribution Date

RANGE ACTION AND SAFETY PLAN (RASP) - RIFLE LF 9

References. List the references to be used in the RASP.


For example:

A. Inf Trg Vol IV Pam 21-C, Regulations for Cadets Training with Cadet and
Infantry Weapon Systems and Pyrotechnics - 2008.

General

1. Opening paragraph stating the aim of the range and outlining who, when and
where the activity is to take place.

Aim

2. State the aim of the RASP.

Appointments

3. List the key appointments, for example:

Ser Appointment Rank Name Quals Held Remarks


1 Exercise Director
2 Senior Planning Officer
3 Planning Officer
4 RCO

RESTRICTED 4A-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 RESTRICTED

Ser Appointment Rank Name Quals Held Remarks


5 Safety Supervisors/Coaches
6 Ammunition NCO/CFAV
7 OIC Console/Butt IC
8 Medical
9 Concurrent Activity
Co-ordinating Instructions

4. Activity Risk Assessment. State if the Safe System of Training is in place


or, if not, include the risk assessment and where appropriate the 2* dispensation
to cover the aspect that does not comply.

a. Safe System of Training. Should any training incident or accident


occur the details contained in Section 6 of Chapter One of Reference A are
to be followed. It is the responsibility of the RCO to ensure that the
procedure is understood by all members of the range staff and firers.

5. Medical Risk Assessment. Explain in outline the Medical Risk


Assessment:

a. Immediate Action (IA)

(1) Explain and list the IA procedure.

b. Minor Casualty. After the IA, the following plan will be carried out:

(1) Explain the procedure for a minor casualty.

c. Major Casualty. After the IA, the following plan will be carried out:

(1) Explain the procedure for a major casualty.

6. Changes/Amendments to the Activity Plan. State that any change is to


be recorded and signed by the RCO.

Staff Duties

7. RCO. List the responsibilities of the RCO to conduct the range.

8. Safety Supervisors. List the responsibilities of the Safety Supervisors or


Coaches.

4A-2 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Amdt 1/Apr/10

9. Console Operator/Butt IC. List the responsibilities of the Console


Operator or Butt IC.

10. Medical. List the responsibilities of the nominated medic.

11. Telephone Orderly. List the duties of the Telephone Orderly (if
applicable).

12. Ammunition NCO. List the responsibilities of the Ammunition


NCO/CFAV.

Action At Range Control

13. State the procedure for the RCO on arrival at the range.

Staff Brief

14. State the staff brief for the RCO.

15. Additional points pertinent to the Safety Supervisors/ Coaches must be


covered as follows:

a. State the additional points.

16. Additional points pertinent to the Console Operator/Butt IC must be covered


as follows:

a. State the additional points.

17. Additional points pertinent to any Sentries/Telephone Orderly/Ammunition


NCO/CFAV must be covered as follows:

a. State the additional points (as applicable).

Setting Up

18. The RCO is to ensure the following are carried out:

a. State the actions to be carried out.

Rehearsals

19. Explain the Rehearsals procedure.


3

RESTRICTED 4A-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 RESTRICTED

On arrival of the Firers

20. List the sequence of events to be followed:

a. NSPs. State the procedure for conducting the firers’ NSPs.

b. Hearing Protection. State the importance of checking for


serviceable, issued hearing protection and include the mandatory
requirement to wear hearing protection.

c. Additional Weapon Safety Checks. For example, checking the


barrel of the Rifle and LSW for obstructions.

d. Details. State the information for each detail and include the change
round procedure.

Detail 1 Detail 2 Detail 3 Detail 4


Firers Concurrent Activity Butts Re-shoots if
Butts Firers Concurrent Activity required and time
Concurrent Activity Butts Firers permits

e. Safety Brief. The Safety Brief to firers must cover the following:

(1) List the safety points.

f. Range Area Layout. Explain the layout of the area.

g. Revision. Conduct relevant revision.

h. Introduction. Give an introduction to the LFMT (include the reason


why, incentive and aim).

i. Scoring System/Standards. Explain the scoring system/standards


and HPS/Pass Mark.

j. Ammunition. List the ammunition and magazine requirements.

k. Range Clearance. The RCO is to obtain clearance from Range


Control prior to firing commencing.

Completion Of Each Detail

21. On completion of each detail the following procedure is to be followed:

4A-4 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Amdt 1/Apr/10

a. Explain the procedure for completion of each detail.

Completion Of The Last Detail

21. On completion of the last detail the following procedure is to be followed:

a. Explain the procedure for completion of last detail.

Return Of Ammunition

22. Once ammunition has been returned to store:

a. List the actions to be carried out on returning ammunition to the store.

(Signature)

Name
Rank
For Exercise Director

Annexes:

A. Conducting notes.
B. Time Chart
C. Admin Instruction.

Distribution:

OC A Coy CQMS A Coy


2IC A Coy All Safety Supervisors
CSM A Coy Console Operator/IC Butts

Copy to:

RLO SENTA
CO (Exercise Director)
Training Wing Officer
5

RESTRICTED 4A-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 RESTRICTED

4A-6 RESTRICTED
RESTRICTED Amdt 1/Apr/10

Annex A to
Reference
Dated

CONDUCTING NOTES

1. The conducting notes for the live firing lesson are to be included here.

A-1

RESTRICTED 4A-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 RESTRICTED

A-2

4A-8 RESTRICTED
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Chapter 5
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS FOR WEAPONS AND
PYROTECHNICS ISSUED TO CADET FORCES
Scope
CONTENTS
0501. Chapter 5 sets out all those SCOPE 5-1
weapon and pyrotechnic Weapon Handling WHTS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 5-1
Tests (WHT) issued to Cadet Forces. LAYOUT 5-1

FREQUENCY 5-1
WHTs General Instructions CONDUCT AND TESTING 5-1

0502. Purpose. The purpose of the USE OF PYROTECHNICS BY CADETS 5-2


WHTs is to provide a measure of personal THE NO. 8 RIFLE 5-3
weapon handling skill throughout the Cadet THE L98A1 CADET GP RIFLE 5-7
Forces in line with safety and handling
THE L81A2 CADET TARGET RIFLE 5-12
requirements. Mandatory testing ensures
that handling skills of all personnel, up to THE L85A2 RIFLE 5-17

and including the rank of lieutenant colonel, L86A2 LSW 5-22


where relevant, are monitored accurately THE L98A2 CADET GP RIFLE 5-27
and rectified if necessary. SIMULATOR BATTLE SOUND (SBS) L35A1 5-35

SMOKE SCEENING GRENADE L72 & L83 5-37


Layout L50 SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADE 5-39

0503. Each WHT follows a similar SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADE L64-L71 AND
L100/L101 SERIES 5-41
sequence, stating the occasions where
ROCKET HAND FIRED L10A1, L11A1
testing is to take place, giving guidance on AND L12A1 5-43
conduct and any restrictions, and defining
ROCKET HAND FIRED L5A4 5-45
standards to be achieved.
SIGNAL KIT PYROTECHNIC 16 MM MINIFLARE 5-47

FLARE TRIPWIRE KIT L10A1 5-50


Frequency
L1A1 SMOKE GENERATOR 5-55
0504. WHTs must always be successfully
completed prior to initial live firing of any Infantry or Cadet Weapon System. Following
initial live firing, WHTs must be successfully completed within six months prior to firing
any weapons or pyrotechnics.

Conduct and Testing


0505. WHTs for all Inf and Cadet (WS) must be conducted in strict accordance with
the conditions set out in this chapter. The WHTs must be conducted by a qualified Skill
at Arms Instructor who has demonstrated currency and competence by passing the
specific WHTs for the weapon he/she is conducting tests for, within the specified time
frame.

PROTECT 5-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Use of Pyrotechnics by Cadets


0506. It is strictly forbidden for Cadets to be issued or use any form of
pyrotechnic. Pyrotechnics may only be used by competent CFAVs.

5-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

THE NO. 8 RIFLE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the No. 8 Rifle are to be
competent in its use. Passing the WHTs proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit personal record.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs Cadets and CFAVs are to have completed the rifle lessons
contained in The Cadet Manual.

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

PROTECT 5-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent


on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
Cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the rifle. Retesting is to be carried out
after completion of remedial training.

WHTs No. 8 Rifle


Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Markings
No
1 Safety No 8 Rifle Before the Order the cadet/CFAV to The cadet/CFAV
Table cadet/CFAV is pick up the rifle and put passes the test only
called forward, it on the table. Keeping if all the actions are
lay the rifle on the muzzle pointing in carried out correctly.
the ground such a direction that no
unloaded, bolt damage will arise in the
closed and the event of an accident dis-
safety catch not charge, the cadet/CFAV
applied. should:
a. Pick up the rifle.
b. Push the safety
catch fully forward.
c. Open the breech
by moving the bolt
to the rear.
d. Check the cham
ber is empty/ clear.
e. Lay the rifle on the
table with the bolt
open.

2 Safety No 8 Rifle The rifle is laid Order the cadet/CFAV to The cadet/CFAV
on the table from hand you the weapon passes the test only
Table the previous test. from the table. Keeping if all the actions are
The instructor is the muzzle pointing in carried out correctly.
to close the bolt such a direction so that
but not apply the no danger will arise in
safety catch. the event of an acciden-
tal discharge, he should:
a. Pick up the rifle.
b. Push the safety
catch fully forward.
c. Open the breech by
moving the bolt to the
rear.
d. Check for himself
that the chamber is
empty/clear.
e. State the rifle is
unloaded.
f. Hand it over to the
instructor with the bolt
open.

5-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No
3 Load No 8 1. The instructor 1. Order “Prone Position The cadet/CFAV
Rifle is to lay the rifle – Down – Load”. The passes the test only
on the floor, bolt cadet/CFAV is to go if all the actions are
open, safety through the actions of carried out correctly.
catch forward. loading the rifle.
The sights are
not to be set at The cadet/CFAV
25. passes the test only
if all the actions are
2. No ammuni- 2. The action is completed carried out correctly
tion to be used when the bolt is closed and questions
for this or any and the safety catch is set answered correctly.
other test. This at Safe (on).
is to be
explained to the
cadet. Question the cadet/CFAV Answer

3. Why must a .22 round If the round is not


be hand fed into the cham- correctly seated in
ber until resistance is felt? the chamber it may
cause a premature
explosion.
4 Sight No 8 Rifle loaded from 1. Order a range (25m). 1. The cadet/CFAV
Setting Rifle Test 3. passes the test if
and a.The cadet/CFAVis to
fold up the rear sight they make 2 or less
Misfire mistakes and he
Drill and set it to the range
ordered answers the ques-
b. The instructor is to tions correctly
check the sights.

2. Order “1 Round – In 2. If the cadet/CFAV


Your Own Time – Go fails to comply with
On”. any rule of safety
whilst carrying out
the test he fails
regardless of suc-
cess in any other
3. Order “Misfire”. part of the training
a. The cadet/CFAV test.
should remain in the
aiming position for 5
seconds. Order “Round
Not Fired”.
b. The cadet/CFAV
should then unload the
misfired round and place
it aside.
c. Load the next
round and carry on
firing.

PROTECT 5-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No

5 Unload No 8 Rifle Question the Cadet/CFAV

1. Order “Stop-Unload”.
The cadet should:
a. Open the breech by
moving the bolt to the rear.
Look into the chamber to
ensure it is clear, then
close the bolt.
b. Bring the rifle into the
shoulder, aim at the target
or bullet catcher and oper-
ate the trigger. Open the
breech and lower the back
sight.

2. Order “Stand Up”. The


cadet should :
a. Lay the rifle down on its
left side.
b. Stand up, leaving the
rifle on the floor, with the
bolt open.

Question the Cadet/CFAV Answer


1. What must you NOT do
with a misfired .22 round? 1. The cadet/CFAV
must state: Under
no circumstances
will a misfired
round be re-
loaded in an
attempt to refire it.
The misfired round
must be kept sep-
2. What action would take arate.
if:
a. A bullet is not heard or Answer
seen to Strike the target?
b. The noise made by the a & b, Inform the
explosion of the round Range Conducting
going off is less than nor-
mal? Officer

Marking: P = Pass – A pass standard in all tests.


F = Fail – Any safety mistake or a fail in any test.

5-6 PROTECT
PROTECT

THE L98A1 CADET GP RIFLE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L98A1 Rifle are to be
competent in its use. Passing the WHTs proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit personal record.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs Cadets and CFAVs are to have completed the rifle lessons
contained in The Cadet Manual.

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks using drill ammunition.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

PROTECT 5-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent


on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
Cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the rifle. Retesting is to be carried out
after completion of remedial training.

WHTs L98A1 Cadet GP Rifle

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No
1 Safety GP Rifle 1. Before the 1. Order the cadet/CFAV The cadet/CFAV pass-
cadet/CFAV is to hand you the rifle. He es the test only if he
Magazine called for- should: carries out all actions
(fitted ward lay the a. Lie down behind the correctly.
with dep- rifle on the rifle.
ressor) b. Ensure that it is
ground pointing in a safe direc-
Chair (empty maga- tion.
zine fitted) c. Put the safety catch
and the safe- to S.
ty catch not d. Remove the maga-
applied. zine and place in the
pouch. Cock the
2. Tell him to weapon and check that
sit down, take the breech is empty.
his name and e. Allow the working
enter it on the parts to go forward.
f. Put the safety catch
assessment to F.
sheet. g. Operate the trigger.
h. Put the safety catch
to S.
i. Close the dust
cover.
j. Stand up.
k. Check the safety
catch is at safe prior to
cocking the weapon,
operate the holding
open catch, check for
himself and then show
you that the body
chamber and bolt face
are clear and then
hand over the rifle.
l. The instructor, hav-
ing received the rifle,
will operate the bolt
release catch, put the
safety catch to Fire ‘F’,
operate the trigger, put
the safety catch to
Safe ‘S’ and close the
dust cover.

5-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No
2 Stripping GP Rifle Arrange the 1. Order the cadet/CFAV 1. The main purpose of
and with stores on the to strip the rifle (the bolt the test is to assess the
Cleaning sling fit- table. carrier assembly is to cadet’s/CFAV’s ability to
ted. be removed but NOT strip and assemble the
stripped into its compo- rifle.
Cleansing nent parts).
Kit com- 2. The cadet/CFAV
plete 2. Ask the cadet/CFAV passes if he makes no
with to answer or demon- more than 2 mistakes.
Flanne- strate the answers to
llette. three of the following: 3. If he fails to comply
a. Cleaning the barrel with any rule of safety
Table using the cleaning whilst carrying out the
rod. test he fails regardless
b. Cleaning the barrel of success of 2 above.
using the pullthrough. 4. NO time limit to be
c. What is the maxi- set.
mum size of flannel-
lette that can by used
to clean or lubricate
the bore?
d. Show how you
would remove any
fouling or debris from
the chamber.
e. Show how you
would examine the
barrel for cleanliness.
f. When should mag-
azines be stripped?
g. Strip and assemble
a magazine.
3. Order the
Cadet/CFAV to
‘Assemble the Rifle
and carry out the func-
tion test’. The
cadet/CFAV is to con-
duct the functions test
from the prone position.

3 Magazine Magazine Start with the 1. Order the The cadet/CFAV passes
filling magazine cadet/CFAVto fill 10 the test if he fills and
10 loose empty. rounds. empties the magazine
drill correctly (Target time
rounds. 2. Order the cadet to 20 seconds).
empty the magazine.
Table

PROTECT 5-9
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No
4 Loading Rifle with 1. Lay out the 1. Order “Adopt the The cadet/CFAV passes
in Prone sling fit- ground sheet. prone position”. this test if no mistakes
Position ted were made.
2. Ensure 2. cadet/CFAV adopts
2 Maga- that the prone position.
zines cadet/CFAV
has 1 maga- 3. Order “With a maga-
2 Drill zine filled zine of 2 drill rounds,
Rounds with 2 drill load”.
1 rounds and 1 4. Order “Ready”.
Ground magazine
Sheet with depres-
sor fitted.
3.
cadet/CFAV
standing at
ease, both
magazines in
the pouch
with the
pouch fas-
tened.
5 Making As for The 1. Order “With a maga-
Safe Test 4 cadet/CFAV zine of 2 drill rounds,
will be in the make safe”.
prone posi- Irrespective of the state
tion (follwing of readiness the
Test 4). weapon is in, the
cadet/CFAVshould
unload as taught, then
put on a magazine of 2
rounds.
2. Order “Ready”.

5-10 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test Subject Stores Preparation Conditions Assessment


No
6 Stoppages As for The 1. Order “In your own
Test 4 cadet/CFAV time, go on”.
will be in the
2. Cadets/CFAVs
prone posi-
should carry out IA and
tion (follwing
then empty magazine
Test 5).
drill after firing 2
rounds.
3. After completion of
drill, order “Rifle firing
alright – rifle stops”.
4. Cadets/CFAVs
should carry out IA.
5. On examination of
body and chamber,
order “Rounds in the
magazine, chamber
clear”.
6. On completion of the
drill, order “Rifle firing
alright – rifle stops”.
7. Cadets/CFAVs
should carry out IA.
8. On examination of
body and chamber,
order “Obstruction”.
9. The test is not com-
plete until the safety
catch is at ‘F’, the
weapon reaimed and
the trigger operated.
10.Order “Stop”.
7 Unloading As for The 1. Order “Unload”.
Test 4 Cadet/CFAV
will be in the 2. The Cadet/CFAV
prone posi- unloads as taught. His
tion (follwing final actions should be
Test 6). to close the dust cover,
pick up the ejected
rounds, clean then
replace them in the
magazine, fasten the
pouch, stand up and
stand at ease.

PROTECT 5-11
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

THE L81A2 CADET TARGET RIFLE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L81A2 Cadet Target
Rifle are to be competent in its use. Passing the WHTs proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit personal record.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs Cadets and CFAVs are to have completed the rifle lessons
contained in The Cadet Manual.

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks using drill ammunition.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-12 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent


on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
Cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the rifle. Retesting is to be carried out
after completion of remedial training.

WHTs L81A2 Cadet Target Rifle


Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
1 Safety 1 L81A2 Rifle, 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to The Cadet/CFAV
with bolt pick up the rifle and put it on is awarded
closed and the table. The Cadet/CFAV, ‘Fail’ is the
safety catch without further direction and safety actions
not applied, keeping the rifle pointing in a are not carried
standing on safe direction, is to: out as listed.
its bipod on a. Pick up the rifle.
the ground b. Check that the safety
with a catch is off (fully forward)
Breech Flag then open the bolt.
beside it. c. Check the chamber is
clear.
Table. d. Insert the Breech Flag.
2. Ask the Cadet/CFAV to
demonstrate what would be
done if no Breech Flag was
available. The bolt should be
removed and left out. Order
the Cadet/CFAV to replace the
bolt. The Serial Number
should be checked before
replacement.
2 Safety 2 As safety 1 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to The Cadet/CFAV
above. hand over the rifle. The is awarded
Cadet/CFAV, without further ‘Fail’ is the
direction and keeping the rifle safety actions
pointing in a safe direction, is are not carried
to: out as listed.
a. Pick up the rifle.
b. Show the chamber and
bolt way are clear. Replace
the Breech Flag.
c. State that the rifle is
unloaded and hand it over.

PROTECT 5-13
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
3 Unpacking, L81A2 rifle, 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to pre- 1. The answer
Preparation bipod fixed, pare the rifle for cleaning. The to question a.
for with bolt Cadet/CFAV should remove the must be cor-
Cleaning, open and bolt, checking the Serial rect.
Cleaning with a Number against that on the
action, then remove th Breech 2. Standard:
and Breech Flag Flag. Stop the Cadet/CFAV and a. Pass: 1 to
Reassembly inserted. ask question a. and any three 2 mistakes.
. of the four remaining questions. b. Fail: More
a. On unpacking the rifle, than 2 mis-
what must you fit first? takes.
b. In addition to flannellette
and a jag or phosphor 3. Award no
bronze brush, what must qualification if
you always use with a any mistake
cleaning rod? affects safety.
c. What size flannellette is
used to clean the barrel?
d. What would you use to
clean the chamber?
e. What would you use for
cleaning the stock?
2. Order the Cadet/CFAV to
replace the bolt. The
Cadet/CFAV should, without fur-
ther direction, check that the
Serial Numbers on the bolt and
the rifle match, reinsert the bolt
and insert a Breech Flag.
3. Tell the Cadet/CFAV to place
the rifle on the floor, then step
back so that the rifle is ready
for the next test.
4 Firing Rifle stand- 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to pre- The Cadet/CFAV
Proce-dures ing on floor, pare the shoot. The Cadet/CFAV is awarded
1- bolt open, should put on the sling. ‘Fail’ is the
Preparation. Breech Flag 2. Order the Cadet/CFAV to pick safety actions
inserted, up the rifle. The Cadet/CFAV is are not carried
Sling and (if to pick up the rifle, check it is out as listed.
available) unloaded and re-insert the
undamaged Breech Flag.
drill rounds 3. Order the Cadet/CFAV to put
and scale the rifle on the Firing Point.
target. The Cadet/CFAV is to set the
rifle on the Firing Point, point-
ing down range.

5-14 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
5 Firing Sling, Rifle 1. Order "Adopt the prone 1. Standard:
Procedures on bipod with position. Pick up the rifle".
a. Pass: 1 to
2 Breech Flag The Cadet/CFAV is to adopt the 2 mistakes.
inserted and prone position, pick up the rifle b. Fail: More
(if available) and attach the sling. than 2 mis-
3 undam- takes.
aged drill 2. Order "Load". The
rounds and Cadet/CFAV is to remove the 2. Award no
scale target. Breech Flag, place a round in qualification if
the bolt way and slide it into the any mistake
chamber either by hand or by affects safety.
pushing the bolt forward; put
the rifle butt in the shoulder and
close the bolt with the barrel
horizontal, pointing at the tar-
get.

3. Order "Fire". The


Cadet/CFAV is to fire the round,
open the bolt and lower the butt
to the ground.

4. Order "Go on". The


Cadet/CFAV is to insert another
round, put the butt to the shoul-
der and close the bolt. As soon
as the bolt is closed, say "The
coach says Stop, Rest". The
Cadet/CFAVis to open the bolt
and take the rifle from the
shoulder.

5. Coach orders "Get ready -


Go on". The Cadet/CFAV is to
return the rifle to the shoulder,
close the bolt and prepare to
fire.

6. Say "The Range Officer


orders ‘Stop’ ". The
Cadet/CFAV is to open the bolt,
take the rifle from the shoulder
and complete the Unload but
does not need to put in a
Breech Flag unless told to.

PROTECT 5-15
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
5 Firing Proce- Sling, Rifle 7. Order "Carry on". The 1. Standard:
cont dures 2 on bipod with Cadet/CFAV is to reload and
a. Pass: 1 to
Breech Flag fire. 2 mistakes.
inserted and b. Fail: More
(if available) 8. Immediately say "Trigger than 2 mis-
3 undam- operates but round does takes.
aged drill not fire". The Cadet/CFAVis to
rounds and remain in the aim for 10 sec- 2. Award no
scale target. onds. Say "Round still does qualification if
not fire". The Cadet/CFAV is to any mistake
carry out the procedure for affects safety.
unloading a live round. set the
round aside, load another
round and continue firing.

9. Immediately say "That was


your last round". The
Cadet/CFAV is to unload, check
the chamber and look for the
individual to inspect the rifle.
Then once inspected, insert a
Breech Flag.

10. Ask the following ques-


tions:
a. What would you do if
you had no Breech Flag?
b. What must you check
before inserting the bolt?

11. Tell the Cadet/CFAV to


leave the rifle on the pointm
dress back and remove the
sling. The test is over.

5-16 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

THE L85A2 RIFLE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
(FOR USE WITH DCCT ONLY)
General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L85A2 Rifle are to be
competent in its use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit personal record.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs Cadets and CFAVs are to have completed the rifle lessons
contained in Pamphlet No. 5 (The SA80 (5.56mm) System (Rifle, Light Support and
Carbine) and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks using drill ammunition.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

PROTECT 5-17
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent


on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
Cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the rifle. Retesting is to be carried out
after completion of remedial training.

WHTs RIFLE

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Safety Rifle with 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to ‘take The cadet/CFAV
sling fitted, control of the weapon’, without is to be awarded
unloaded, further direction the cadet/CFAV is ‘Fail’ if the safe-
safety catch to take control of the weapon and ty actions are not
at ‘F’, change carry out NSPs. carried out cor-
lever at ‘R’, 2. Order the Cadet/CFAV to hand rectly.
weapon lying over the weapon. The cadet/CFAV
on the is to, point the muzzle in a safe
ground. direction and carry out NSPs
before handling over their weapon
to the instructor.

2 Stripping, Rifle with 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to strip 1. Standard:


Cleaning sling fitted, the rifle (the bolt carrier assembly Pass — 1 or 2
and unloaded, is to be removed but NOT stripped mistakes.
Assembling cleaning roll into its component parts). Fail — More
(with combi- 2. Ask the Cadet/CFAVto answer than 2 mistakes.
nation tool or demonstrate the answers to 2. Award no
out), three of the following: qualification if
flanelette and a. Cleaning the barrel using the any mistake
oil. cleaning rod. affects safety.
b. Cleaning the barrel using the
pullthrough.
c. What is the maximum size of
flannelette that can be used to
clean or lubricate the bore?
d. Show how you would remove
any fouling or debris from the
chamber.
e. Show how you would examine
the barrel for cleanliness.
f. When should magazines be
stripped?
g. Strip and assemble a magazine.
3. Order the Cadet/CFAV to
‘Assemble the Rifle and carry
out the function test’. The
cadet/CFAV is to conduct the func-
tions test from the prone position.

5-18 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


3 Magazine 30 rounds, 1. On the command “Go” Standard:
Filling magazine, the Cadet/CFAV fills his Pass — Less than 75
stopwatch. magazine with 30 rounds seconds.
by hand. Fail — Over 75 sec-
Instructor’s onds.
Note: All
ammunition is
to be removed
from the maga-
zine. Fit
depressor.
4 Loading – Rifle, one full Give the command “Adopt 1. The Cadet/CFAV is
Prone magazine in the Prone Position”. to be told that no time
Position fastened “Load”. Pouches must be limit is imposed but
pouch. refastened. that all actions should
be carried out quickly
and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Instructor’s Fail — More than 1
Note: Load mistake.
with a maga- Instructor’s Note: Leave 3. Award no qualifica-
zine fitted with weapon loaded for tion if any mistake
a depressor. Test No 5. affects safety.
5 Ready Drill Rifle loaded Once the Cadet/CFAVhas 1. The actions tested
Prone (from Test aligned himself, on to the are those relating to
Position No. 4), target order “Ready” or the Ready Drill only.
representative issue a range. 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
targets to be told that no time
limit is imposed but
that all actions should
be carried out quickly
and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1
mistake.
4. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.

PROTECT 5-19
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


6 Immediate Rifle loaded 1. Order “Fire”. 1. The actions tested
Action (IA) (from Test 2. Order “Rifle firing alright are those relating to the
No. 5), – rifle stops”. Cadet/CFAV (IA) Drill only.
representative to carry out the IA...”Cocking 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
targets handle fully forward”. to be told that no time
Cadet/CFAV is to tap for- limit is imposed but that
ward on the cocking handle all actions should be
and continue firing. carried out quickly and
3. Order “Rifle fires alright” correctly.
“Stop”. 3. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1 mis-
take.
4. Award no qualification
if any mistake affects
safety.
7 IA and Rifle loaded, 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing 1. The actions tested
Loose representative alright – rifle stops”. are those relating to the
Magazine targets. Cadet/CFAV to carry out the Loose Magazine Drill
Drill IA...”Cocking handle fully only.
forward”. Cadet/CFAV is to 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
tap forward on the cocking to be told that no time
handle and continue firing. limit is imposed but that
2. Order “Rifle still fails to all actions should be car-
fire”. ried out quickly and cor-
3. On examination of body rectly.
and chamber order “Rounds 3. Standard:
in magazine – chamber Pass — 1 mistake.
clear”. Allow the Fail — More than 1 mis-
Cadet/CFAV to complete the take.
drill and fire. 4. Award no qualification
4. Order “Stop”. if any mistake affects
safety.
8 IA and Rifle loaded, 1. Order “Fire” “Rifle firing 1. The actions tested
Obstruction representative alright – rifle stops”. are those relating to the
Drill targets. Cadet/CFAV to carry out the Obstruction Drill only.
IA...“Cocking handle NOT 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
fully forward”. to be told that no time
2. On examination of body limit is imposed but that
and chamber, order all actions should be
“Obstruction”. carried out quickly and
3. When the Cadet/CFAV correctly.
has removed the magazine 3. Standard:
and attempted to clear the Pass — 1 mistake.
obstruction by hand or using Fail — More than 1 mis-
a tool from the maintenance take.
kit, order “Obstruction 4. Award no qualification
Clear”. if any mistake affects
4. When the Cadet/CFAV safety.
has visually inspected the
chamber, order “Chamber
Clear”.
5. Cadet/CFAV is to com-
plete the obstriction drill.
6. Order “Stop”.

5-20 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


9 IA and Rifle 1. Instruct the Cadet/CFAVto 1. The actions tested
Empty loaded, rep- cock the weapon and apply the are those relating to
Magazine resentative Holding Open Catch, with the the Empty Magazine
Drill targets. working parts held to the rear, Drill only.
order “Test and adjust – fire” 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
“Rifle firing alright – rifle to be told that no time
stops”. limit is imposed but
2. Cadet/CFAV is to carry out that all actions should
the IA...”Empty Magazine”. be carried out quickly
Cadet/CFAV is to carry out the and correctly.
drill for an empty magazine. 3. Standard:
3. When the Cadet/CFAV has Pass — 1 mistake.
completed the drill and contin- Fail — More than 1
ued firing, order “Stop”. mistake.
4. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.
10 Unloading Rifle loaded The test follows on from Test 1. The Cadet/CFAV is
and ready No. 9. Give the command to be told that no time
(from Test “Unload”. The test is not com- limit is imposed but
No. 9) plete until the Cadet/CFAV has that all actions should
recovered the ejected round, be carried out quickly
replaced it in the magazine and correctly.
and fastened the pouch. 2. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1
mistake.
3. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.

PROTECT 5-21
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

L86A2 LSW
WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L86A2 LSW are to be
competent in its use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs cadets and CFAVs are to have completed the LSW lessons
contained in Pamphlet No. 5-C the L98A2 Cadet GP Rifle (5-56mm), The L86A2 Light
Support Weapon and Associated Equipment.
Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks using drill ammunition.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-22 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent


on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
Cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the LSW. Retesting is to be carried out
after remedial training has been completed.

WHTs LSW
Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking
1 Safety LSW with sling 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to ‘take The
fitted, unloaded control of the weapon’, without cadet/CFAV is
safety catch at further direction the cadet/CFAV to be awarded
‘F’ and change is to take control of the weapon ‘Fail’ if the
lever at ‘R’ and carryout NSPs. safety actions
weapon lying 2. Order the Cadet/CFAV to hand are not carried
on the ground. over the weapon. The out correctly.
cadet/CFAV is to, point the muz-
zle in a safe direction and carry-
out NSPs before handling over
their weapon to the instructor.
Note: All drills to be conducted
from the prone position.
2 Stripping, LSW with sling 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to strip 1. Standard:
Cleaning fitted, the LSW (the bolt carrier assem- Pass — 1 or 2
and unloaded, bly is to be removed but NOT mistakes.
Assembling cleaning roll stripped into its component parts). Fail — More
(with combina- 2. Ask the Cadet/CFAV to answer than 2 mis-
tion tool out), or demonstrate the answers to takes.
flanelette and three of the following: 2. Award no
oil. a. Cleaning the barrel using the qualification if
cleaning rod. any mistake
b. Cleaning the barrel using the affects safety.
pullthrough.
c. What is the maximum size of
flannelette that can be used to
clean or lubricate the bore?
d. Show how you would remove
any fouling or debris from the
chamber.
e. Show how you would examine
the barrel for cleanliness.
f. When should magazines be
stripped?
g. Strip and assemble a maga-
zine.
3. Order the Cadet/CFAV to
‘Assemble the LSW and carry
out the function test’. The
cadet/CFAV is to conduct the
functions test from the prone
position.

PROTECT 5-23
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


3 Magazine 30 rounds, 1. On the command “Go” Standard:
Filling magazine, the Cadet/CFAV fills his Pass — Less than 75
stopwatch. magazine with 30 rounds seconds.
by hand. Fail — Over 75 sec-
Instructor’s onds.
Note: All
ammunition is
to be removed
from the maga-
zine. Fit
depressor.
4 Loading – LSW, one full 1. Order ‘Bipod 1. The Cadet/CFAV is
Prone magazine in Supported Position - to be told that no time
Bipod fastened Down’. limit is imposed but
Supported pouch. 2. Give the command that all actions should
Position ‘Load’. Pouches must be be carried out quickly
fastened. and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Instructor’s Instructor’s Note: Load Fail — More than 1
Note: Load with the magazine fitted mistake.
with a maga- with the depressor. Leave 3. Award no qualifica-
zine fitted with weapon loaded for Test tion if any mistake
a depressor. No. 5. affects safety.
5 Ready Drill LSW loaded 1. Order the Cadet/CFAV to 1. The actions tested
Prone (from Test align on the target. are those relating to
Position No. 4), 2. Once the Cadet/CFAV the Ready Drill only.
representative has aligned himself, on to 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
targets the target order “Ready” or to be told that no time
issue a range. limit is imposed but
that all actions should
be carried out quickly
and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1
mistake.
4. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.

5-24 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


6 Immediate LSW loaded 1. Order “Fire”. 1. The actions tested
Action (IA) (from Test 2. Order “LSW firing alright are those relating to the
No. 5), – LSW stops”. Cadet/CFAV (IA) Drill only.
representative to carry out the IA...”Cocking 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
targets handle fully forward”. to be told that no time
Cadet/CFAV is to tap for- limit is imposed but that
ward on the cocking handle all actions should be
and continue firing. carried out quickly and
3. Order “LSW fires alright” correctly.
“Stop”. 3. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1 mis-
take.
4. Award no qualification
if any mistake affects
safety.
7 IA and LSW loaded, 1. Order “Fire” “LSW firing 1. The actions tested
Loose representative alright – LSW stops”. are those relating to the
Magazine targets. Cadet/CFAV is to carry out Loose Magazine Drill
Drill the IA...”Cocking handle only.
fully forward”. Cadet/CFAV 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
is to tap forward on the cock- to be told that no time
ing handle and continue fir- limit is imposed but that
ing. all actions should be car-
2. Order “LSW still fails to ried out quickly and cor-
fire”. rectly.
3. On examination of body 3. Standard:
and chamber order “Rounds Pass — 1 mistake.
in magazine – chamber Fail — More than 1 mis-
clear”. Allow the take.
Cadet/CFAV to complete the 4. Award no qualification
drill and fire. if any mistake affects
4. Order “Stop”. safety.
8 IA and LSW loaded, 1. Order “Fire” “LSW firing 1. The actions tested
Obstruction representative alright – LSW stops”. are those relating to the
Drill targets. Cadet/CFAV to carry out the Obstruction Drill only.
IA...“Cocking handle NOT 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
fully forward”. to be told that no time
2. On examination of body limit is imposed but that
and chamber, order all actions should be
“Obstruction”. carried out quickly and
3. When the Cadet/CFAVhas correctly.
removed the magazine and 3. Standard:
attempted to clear the Pass — 1 mistake.
obstruction by hand or using Fail — More than 1 mis-
a tool from the maintenance take.
kit, order “Obstruction 4. Award no qualification
Clear”. if any mistake affects
4. When the Cadet/CFAV safety.
has visually inspected the
chamber, order “Chamber
Clear”.
5. Cadet/CFAV is to com-
plete the obstriction drill.
6. Order “Stop”.

PROTECT 5-25
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


9 IA and LSW loaded, 1. Instruct the Cadet/CFAV to 1. The actions tested
Empty representa- cock the weapon and apply the are those relating to
Magazine tive targets. Holding Open Catch, with the the Empty Magazine
Drill working parts held to the rear, Drill only.
order “Test and adjust – fire” 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
“LSW firing alright – LSW to be told that no time
stops”. limit is imposed but
2. Cadet/CFAV is to carry out that all actions should
the IA...”Empty Magazine”. be carried out quickly
Cadet/CFAV is to carry out the and correctly.
drill for an empty magazine. 3. Standard:
3. When the Cadet/CFAV has Pass — 1 mistake.
completed the drill and contin- Fail — More than 1
ued firing, order “Stop”. mistake.
4. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.
10 Unloading LSW loaded The test follows on from Test 1. The Cadet/CFAV is
and ready No. 5. Give the command to be told that no time
(from Test “Unload”. The test is not com- limit is imposed but
No. 9) plete until the Cadet/CFAV has that all actions should
recovered the ejected round, be carried out quickly
replaced it in the magazine and correctly.
and fastened the pouch. 2. Standard:
Pass — 1 mistake.
Fail — More than 1
mistake.
3. Award no qualifica-
tion if any mistake
affects safety.

5-26 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

THE L98A2 CADET GP RIFLE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. Cadets and CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L98A2 Rifle are to be
competent in its use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit personal recorded.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking the WHTs Cadets and CFAV are to have completed the rifle
lessons contained in Pamphlet No. 5-C The L98A2 Cadet GP Rifle (5.56 mm), L86A2
Light Support Weapon and Associated Equipment.

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructors who have passed
the WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively and are to be carried out in
barracks using drill ammunition.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass - Pass in all tests.
b. Fail - Fail in any test.
7. Training Performance Standards. A Cadet or CFAV is considered competent on
achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
cadet or CFAV is not competent in the use of the rifle. Retesting is to be carried out
after completion of remedial training.

PROTECT 5-27
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
1 Safety Rifle with sling 1. Order the Cadet or CFAV to The
fitted, ‘take control of the weapon’, with- cadet/CFAV is
unloaded, out further direction the cadet/CFAV to be awarded
is to take control of the weapon and ‘Fail’ if the
safety catch at carry out NSPs. safety actions
‘F’ weapon 2. Order the Cadet/CFAV to hand are not carried
lying on the over the weapon. The cadet/CFAV out correctly.
ground. is to, point the muzzle in a safe
direction and carryout NSPs before
handling over their weapon to the
instructor.

2 Stripping, Rifle with sling 1. Order the Cadet or CFAV to Standard:


Cleaning fitted, strip the rifle as for daily
and unloaded, cleaning. Ask the following Pass – 1-2
Assembling cleaning kit questions: mistakes.
(with a. What size flannelette is used
combination to clean the barrel?
tool out), b. What size flannelette is used Fail – More
flannelette and to oil the barrel? than 2
oil. c. Show how you would remove mistakes.
any fouling or debris from the
chamber. Fail – If any
d. Show how you would mistake
examine the barrel for affects safety.
cleanliness.
e. When should magazines be
stripped?
2. Order the Cadet or CFAV to
indicate the parts of the
combination tool that are used
to clean the gas plug
3. Order the Cadet/CFAV to
‘Assemble the Rifle and carry
out the function test’. The
cadet/CFAV is to conduct the
functions test from the prone
position.

5-28 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
3 Magazine Magazine with 1. On the command “Go” Standard:
Filling 10 loose drill the Cadet or CFAV fills the
rounds, magazine with 10 rounds by Pass – Less
stopwatch. hand. than 20
seconds.
Instructors Note:
All ammunition is Fail – Over 20
to be removed seconds.
from the
magazine and a
magazine fitted
with a penny
depressor is to
be used for the
remaining tests.

4 Loading Rifle with sling 1. Order “Adopt the Prone 1. The


Prone fitted one Position”, Cadet or CFAV Cadet/CFAV is
Position magazine in to adopt the Prone Position. to be told that
pouch. 2. Give the command no time limit is
“With a magazine fitted imposed but all
Instructors Note: with a penny depressor actions should
Load with a load”. Pouches must be be carried out
magazine fitted refastened. quickly and
with a depressor. correctly.
Instructors Note: 2. Standard:
Leave weapon loaded for Pass – 1
Test No. 5. mistake.

Fail – More
than 1 mistake.

Fail – If any
mistake affects
safety.

PROTECT 5-29
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
5 Ready Drill Rifle with sling 1. Once the Cadet or 1. The actions
fitted, loaded CFAV has aligned tested are those
(from Test No.4), himself, on to the target relating to the
representative order “Ready”. Ready Drill Only.
targets. 2. The Cadet/CFAV
is to be told that no
time limit is
imposed but all
actions should be
carried out quickly
and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass – 1 mistake.

Fail – More than 1


mistake.

Fail – If any
mistake affects
safety.
6 Making Rifle with sling 1. Order “With a 1. The Cadet/CFAV
Safe fitted, loaded magazine fitted with a is to be told that no
(from Test No.5), depressor make time limit is
representative safe”. imposed but all
targets. 2. The Cadet or CFAV actions should be
is to unload the weapon carried out quickly
as taught and then and correctly.
place on a fresh 2. Standard:
magazine.
Pass – 1 mistake.

Fail – More than 1


mistake.

Fail – If any
mistake affects
safety.

5-30 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
7 Stoppages Rifle with sling 1. Order “300” and 1. The actions tested
Immediate fitted, loaded then “Fire”. are those relating to
Action (IA) (from Test 2. Order “Rifle firing the (IA) Drill only.
No.6), alright – rifle stops”. 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
representative Cadet or CFAV to carry to be told that no time
targets. out the IA drill, limit is imposed but all
“Cocking handle fully actions should be
forward”. Cadet or carried out quickly and
CFAV is to tap forward correctly.
on the cocking handle
and continue firing. 3. Standard:
3. Order “Rifle fires
alright”, “Stop”. Pass – 1 mistake.

Fail – More than 1


mistake.

Fail – If any mistake


affects safety.
8 IA and Rifle with sling 1. Order “Fire”, then 1. The actions tested
Loose fitted, loaded, “Rifle firing alright – are those relating to
Magazine representative rifle stops”. Cadet or the Loose Magazine
Drill targets. CFAV to carry out the Drill only.
IA drill, “Cocking 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
handle fully forward”. to be told that no time
Cadet or CFAV is to tap limit is imposed but all
forward on the cocking actions should be
handle and continue carried out quickly and
firing. correctly.
2. Order “Rifle still 3. Standard:
fails to fire”.
3. On examination of Pass – 1 mistake.
the body and chamber
order “Rounds in the Fail – More than 1
magazine – chamber mistake.
clear”. Allow the
Cadet or CFAV to Fail – If any mistake
complete the drill and affects safety.
fire.
4. Order “Rifle fires
alright”, “Stop”.

PROTECT 5-31
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
9 IA and Rifle with sling 1. Order “Fire”, then 1. The actions tested
Obstruction fitted, loaded, “Rifle firing alright – are those relating to
Drill representative rifle stops”. Cadet or the Obstruction Drill
targets. CFAV to carry out the only.
IA drill, “Cocking 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
handle NOT fully to be told that no time
forward”. limit is imposed but all
2. On examination of actions should be
the body and chamber carried out quickly and
order “Obstruction”. correctly.
3. When the Cadet or 3. Standard:
CFAV has removed the Pass – 1 mistake.
magazine and attempts
to clear the obstruction, Fail – More than 1
order “Obstruction mistake.
clear”.
4. When the cadet or Fail – If any mistake
CFAV has visually affects safety.
inspected the chamber,
order “Chamber
clear”.
5. The Cadet or CFAV
is to then complete the
obstruction drill.
6. Order “Rifle fires
alright”, “Stop”.
10 IA and Rifle with sling 1. Instruct the Cadet or
Empty fitted, loaded, CFAV to cock the
Magazine representative weapon and apply the
Drill targets. Holding Open Catch,
with the working parts
held to the rear, order
“Test and adjust –
Fire” “Rifle firing
alright - rifle stops”.
2. Cadet or CFAV to
carry out IA Drill, order
“Empty magazine”.
Cadet or CFAV is to
carry out the drill for an
empty magazine.

5-32 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
3. When the Cadet or 1. The actions tested
CFAV has completed are those relating to
the drill and continues the Empty Magazine
firing. Drill only.
4. Order “Rifle fires 2. The Cadet/CFAV is
alright”, “Stop”. to be told that no time
limit is imposed but all
actions should be
carried out quickly and
correctly.
3. Standard:
PASS – 1 mistake.

FAIL – More than 1


mistake.

FAIL – If any mistake


affects safety.
11 Unloading Rifle with sling 1. Order “Unload”. 1. The Cadet/CFAV is
fitted, loaded 2. The test is not to be told that no time
and ready complete until the limit is imposed but all
(from Test Cadet or CFAV has actions should be
No.7). recovered the ejected carried out quickly and
round, replaced it in the correctly.
magazine and 3. Standard:
fastened the pouch.
Pass – 1 mistake.

Fail – More than 1


mistake.

Fail – If any mistake


affects safety.

PROTECT 5-33
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

THE SIMULATOR BATTLE SOUND (SBS) L35A1


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the Simulator Battle Sound (SBS)
L35A1 are to be competent in its use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs)
proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live initiation.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAVs are to have completed the SBS lessons contained in
Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the SBS L35A1. Under no circumstances is the
SBS L35A1 to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-34 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the SBS L35A1. Retesting is to be carried out
after remedial training has been completed.

WHTs SIMULATOR BATTLE SOUND

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the following 1. No time limit.
questions: 2. Standards:
Pass — All
Q. What is the main body answers correct.
colour of the SBS? Fail — Any incorrect
A. Blue. answer.
Q. What is the colour of
the ignitor and friction
strike?
A. Red.
2 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the following 1. No time limit.
questions: 2. Standards:
Pass — All
Q. What is the minimum answers correct.
safety distance for: Fail — One or
a. Military personnel? more answers
A. 10 metres. incorrect.
b. Civilian personnel?
A. 100 metres.
Q. What is the fuze burn-
time?
A. 5-9 seconds.
Q. When throwing a num-
ber of SBS what proce-
dures are to be followed to
ensure that they all deto-
nate?
A. Count the explosions.

PROTECT 5-35
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SMOKE SCREENING TRAINING GRENADES — L72 AND L83


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. This Weapon Handling Test (WHT) is applicable for CFAVs who will be issued
with the L72 and L83 Grenades. CFAVs who handle these grenades are to be
competent in their use. Passing the WHT proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Immediately prior to initial live throwing.
c. Within six months prior to live throwing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAV are to have completed the Smoke Screening Training
Grenade lesson contained in Reference D (Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics
and Associated Equipment)).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the L72 and L83 Grenade. Under no circumstances
are live Smoke Screening Training Grenades to be used for this test.

5-36 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.
7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on
achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Smoke Screening Training Grenade.
Retesting is to be carried out after remedial training has been completed.
WHTs SMOKE SCREENING TRAINING GRENADES — L72 and L83 GRENADES

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
of lowing question: 2. Standards:
Ammunition Q. What colour is the Pass — Answer
body of the grenade? correct.
A. Deep bronze green. Fail — Answer
incorrect.
2 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
lowing question: 2. Standards:
Q. Why are smoke Pass — Answer
grenades not allowed correct.
to be thrown into occu- Fail — Answer
pied buildings or con- incorrect.
fined spaces?
A. Because of the toxic
smoke danger to per-
sonnel.

PROTECT 5-37
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

L50 SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADES


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L50 Signal Smoke Grenades are to
be competent in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live throwing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAVs are to have completed the L50 Signal Smoke
Grenade lesson contained in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and
Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the L50 Grenade. Under no circumstances is the
L50 Signal Smoke Grenade to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-38 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the L50 Signal Smoke Grenade. Retesting is to
be carried out after remedial training has been completed.

WHT L50 SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADE

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
and Safety lowing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. What colour is the Pass — All
body of the grenade? answers correct.
A. Eau de nil. Fail — One or
more answers
Q. Why is it not permit- incorrect.
ted to throw the smoke
grenade into an occu-
pied building or con-
fined space?
A.Because of the toxic
smoke danger to per-
sonnel.
Q. Why is it not permit-
ted to place the smoke
grenade by hand?
A. On ignition they
become hot and will
burn the hand.

PROTECT 5-39
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADES — L64- L71 AND L100/L101 SERIES


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the following Grenades are to be
competent in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.
a. L64-L67 Series.
b. L68-L71 Series.
c. L100-L101 Series.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during the relevant training, where applicable, and on
its completion.
b. Within six months prior to live throwing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAVs are to have completed the Smoke Screening
Training Grenade lesson contained in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and
Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the Signal Smoke Grenade. Under no
circumstances are live Signal Smoke Grenades to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-40 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Signal Smoke Grenade. Retesting is to be
carried out after remedial training has been completed.

WHTs SIGNAL SMOKE GRENADE — L64-L71 AND L100/L101 SERIES

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description of Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
Ammunition ing question: 2. Standards:
Q. What colour is the Pass — Answer
body of the grenade? correct.
A. Light green. Fail — Answer
incorrect.
2 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
ing question: 2. Standards:
Q. Why are smoke Pass — Answer
grenades not allowed to correct.
be thrown into occupied Fail — Answer
buildings or confined incorrect.
spaces?
A. Because of the toxic
smoke danger to person-
nel.
3 Consider- Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
ations Prior to ing questions: 2. Standards:
Throwing Q. When taking up a Pass — All
grenade that is not the answers correct.
twist and pull type what Fail — One or
is the first thing you must more answers
check? incorrect.
A. That the safety pin is
fully home with the ends
slightly splayed.
Q. When taking up a
grenade that is the twist
and pull type what is the
first thing you must
check?
A. That the safety arm is
in place behind the safe-
ty pin.
Q. The fuze delay is the
same for each series of
grenade. What is the
fuze delay of the
grenades?
A. 2.5 – 3 seconds.

PROTECT 5-41
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

ROCKET HAND FIRED — L10A1, L11A1 AND L12A1


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the Rocket Hand Fired are to be
competent in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during relevant training, where applicable, and on its
completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAVs are to have completed the Rocket Hand Fired lesson
contained in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the Rocket Hand Fired. Under no circumstances
is the Rocket Hand Fired to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-42 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Rocket Hand Fired. Retesting is to be carried
out after remedial training has been completed.

WHTs ROCKET HAND FIRED — L10A1, L11A1 AND L12A1

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
of ing question: 2. Standards:
Ammunition Q. What are the night Pass — Answer
time identification sym- correct.
bols for the three variants Fail — Answer
of the Rocket Hand incorrect.
Fired?
A. L10A1 - Green,
marked with a parachute
and triangle, L11A1 -
Orange, marked with a
parachute and square,
L12A1 - Illumination,
marked with a parachute
and circle.
2 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
ing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. What is the misfire Pass — All
time for the Rocket Hand answers correct.
Fired? Fail — One or
A. 30 seconds. more answers
Q. When should a Rocket incorrect.
Hand Fired be prepared
for firing?
A. When required for use.
Q. In relation to the top of
the Rocket Hand Fired,
where should the CFAV
position his/her head or
any other part of the
body?
A. So it is not over the
top of the flare.

Note: On completion of the test the Instructors are to remind cadet/CFAV that the
Rocket Hand Fired are NOT to be fired over the tops of cadets heads.

PROTECT 5-43
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

ROCKET HAND FIRED – L5A4


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L5A4 Rocket Hand Fired are to be
competent in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during relevant training, where applicable, and on its
completion.
b. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAVs are to have completed the Rocket Hand Fired lesson
contained in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the Rocket Hand Fired. Under no circum-
stances is the Rocket Hand Fired to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.
7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on
achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Rocket Hand Fired. Retesting is to be carried
out after remedial training has been completed.

5-44 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

WHTs ROCKET HAND FIRED – L5A4

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
of ing questions: 2. Standards:
Ammunition Q. What colour is the Pass — All
body of the rocket? answers correct.
A. Olive green. Fail — One or
Q. What is the colour of more answers
the end caps? incorrect.
A. Black.
2 Character- Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
istics ing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. How long does the Pass — All
flare burn for? answers correct.
A. 30 seconds. Fail — One or
Q. Why should rockets more answers
be fired to burst beyond incorrect.
the target?
A. So the target is silhou-
etted.
Q. When fired at an
angle of 800 mils what is
the approximate range of
the rocket?
A. 300 metres.
Q. What is the raised P
for on the top of the
flare?
A. Night time identifica-
tion.
3 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
ing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. When should the flare Pass — All
be prepared for firing? answers correct.
A. When required for use. Fail — One or
Q. What type of gloves more answers
are to be worn when fir- incorrect.
ing the flare?
A. Issued gloves only.
Note: On completion of the test the Instructors are to remind cadet/CFAV that the
Rocket Hand Fired are NOT to be fired over the tops of cadets heads.

PROTECT 5-45
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

THE SIGNAL KIT PYROTECHNIC 16 MM MINIFLARE


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the 16mm Miniflare are to be competent
in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. Immediately prior to initial live firing.
b. Within six months prior to use.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAV are to have completed the Miniflare lesson contained
in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. The straight tubular pistol can be used to assist the CFAV to answer safety
rule questions. Under no circumstances is the 16 mm Miniflare cartridge to be
used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-46 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Miniflare. Retesting is to be carried out after
remedial training has been completed.

WHTs 16 mm MINIFLARE
Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking
1 Description Nil Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
ing question: 2. Standards:
Q. What are the night Pass — Answer
identification symbols of correct.
the three colours that are Fail — Answer
available? incorrect.
A. Red – raised cross,
Green – raised triangle,
White – raised horizontal
line.
2 Safety Rules Straight Ask the CFAV the follow- 1. No time limit.
Tubular ing questions (allow the 2. Standards:
Pistol CFAV to explain his Pass — All
answer using the pistol): answers correct.
Q. What position must Fail — One or
the thumb stud be in more answers
when a cartridge is being incorrect.
fitted?
A. The forward position.
Q. In what direction must
a pistol with a cartridge
attached be pointed?
A. Pointed upwards at all
times.
Q. What must the thumb
be kept clear of until the
moment of firing?
A. The thumb stud.
Q. When should a car-
tridge be attached to the
pistol?
A. Immediately prior to
firing.

PROTECT 5-47
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


3 Misfire Drill Straight Order the CFAV to carry 1. No time limit.
Tubular out the misfire drill: 2. Standards:
Pistol 1. Order “Fire, Fails to Pass — All drills
Fire”. correct.
2. The CFAV without fur- Fail — One or
ther prompting should more drills incor-
maintain the firing posi- rect.
tion, pull the thumb stud
fully to the rear and
release it.
3. Still fails to fire.
4. The CFAV without fur-
ther prompting should
remain in the firing posi-
tion for 15 seconds.
Unscrew the cartridge
and place to one side.

5-48 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

THE FLARE TRIPWIRE KIT L10A1


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L10A1 Tripflare are to be competent
in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. Immediately prior to setting up and arming a tripflare for the first time.
b. Within six months prior to use.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in the appropriate unit records.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAV are to have completed the Tripflare lesson contained
in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who has passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. The Kit Simulator Flare Tripwire L11A1 must be used for the conduct of this
test. Under no circumstances is a live tripflare to be used during the WHT.
d. CFAVs must pass all tests.
e. CFAV are not permitted to use electrical initiation with Tripflares.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

PROTECT 5-49
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Tripflare. Retesting is to be carried out after
remedial training has been completed.

WHTs THE FLARE TRIPWIRE KIT L10A1

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


1 Recognition Kit Lay the parts out in front 1. No time limit.
Simulator of the CFAV and ask the 2. Standards:
Flare CFAV to identify the fol- Pass — Answer
Tripwire lowing: correct.
L11A1 a. Three metal pickets. Fail — Answer
b. Spring arm. incorrect.
c. 20 m length of tripwire.
d. Anti-glare shield.
e. Flare pot.
2 Setting up of Kit Order the CFAV to set up 1. No time limit.
a Tripflare Simulator the tripflare and indicate 2. Standards:
Flare the area in which the Pass — All drills
Tripwire tripflare is to be set up. correct.
L11A1 The CFAV, without further Fail — One or
direction, is to: more incorrect
a. Drive one picket into drill.
the ground, ensuring that
the ‘U’ prongs are facing
towards the flare pot
location.
b. Place the loop of the
tripwire over the furthest
arm of the ‘U’ and make
one or two turns. Using
the third picket as an axle
walk towards the flare pot
position.
c. At the position for the
flare pot, place down the
tripwire spool. Drive the
second picket into the
ground. Place the spring
arm onto the picket
ensuring that the spring

5-50 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


2 extends away from the
(cont) run of the tripwire and
that the arm is at the
base of the ‘U’. Loosen
the clamp wing nut.
d. Pass the tripwire
around the clamp on the
spring arm. Draw the wire
tight and then secure the
wire by tightening the
clamp wing nut.
e. Remove and retain the
spring arm safety pin.
Place the tripwire spool
with any unused tripwire
at the base of the spring
arm picket.
f. Turn the flare pot
upside down, take hold of
the safety pin and pull on
the striker until the cut is
visible. At the same time
maintain pressure on the
safety pin and rotate the
pivot arm into the cut out.
Once it is in place
release the pressure on
the safety pin. Unhook
the arm on the safety pin.
Undo the clamp wing nut
on the pivot arm.
g. Slide the flare pot onto
the picket ensuring that
the clamp on the pivot
arm is the same side as
the spring arm. Position
the wire on the spring
arm into the clamp on the
flare pot and do up the
clamp wing nut.
h. Position the anti-glare
shield.

PROTECT 5-51
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


3 Arming Kit Order the CFAV to arm 1. No time limit.
Simulator the tripflare. The CFAV, 2. Standards:
Flare without further, direction Pass — All drills
Tripwire is to: correct.
L11A1 a. Keep the head away Fail — One or
from and below the level more incorrect
of the pot. drill.
b. Slide the safety pin out
of its location in the strik-
er and retain it.
4 Disarming Kit Order the CFAV to dis- 1. No time limit.
Simulator arm the tripflare. The 2. Standards:
Flare CFAV, without further Pass — All drills
Tripwire direction, is to: correct.
L11A1 a. Keep the head away Fail — One or
from and below the level more incorrect
of the pot. drill.
b. Insert the safety pin
into the hole in the striker.
5 Dismantling Kit Order the CFAV to dis- 1. No time limit.
the Flare Simulator mantle the tripflare. The 2. Standards:
Flare CFAV, without further Pass — All drills
Tripwire direction, is to: correct.
L11A1 a. Ensure the safety pin Fail — One or
on the flare pot is in more incorrect
place. Loosen the clamp drill.
wing nut and remove the
wire.
b. Slide the flare pot off
the picket and release
the tension on the striker
by pushing the pivot arm.
Do up the safety pin.
c. Hold the tripwire taut
and loosen the clamp
wing nut on the spring
arm. Rewind the tripwire
back onto the spool.
d. Replace the spring
arm safety pin and
remove the spring arm

5-52 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Test No Subject Stores Conditions Marking


5 from the picket. Remove
(cont) the anti-glare shield from
its picket. Collect all pick-
ets and repack.

PROTECT 5-53
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

L1A1 SMOKE GENERATOR


WEAPON HANDLING TEST GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

General
1. CFAVs who are qualified to be issued with the L1A1 Smoke Generator are to be
competent in their use. Passing the Weapon Handling Tests (WHTs) proves this
competence.

Testing
2. WHTs are to be taken as follows:
a. At appropriate stages during relevant training, where applicable, and on its
completion.
b. Immediately prior to live firing.
c. Within six months prior to live firing.

Results
3. Results are to be recorded in personal records held on the appropriate computer
system.

Lessons
4. Prior to taking WHTs CFAV are to have completed the Smoke Generator lesson
contained in Pamphlet No. 13 (Grenades, Pyrotechnics and Associated Equipment).

Conduct
5. WHTs are to be conducted as follows:
a. Conducted by a qualified Skill at Arms (SAA) Instructor who passed the
WHTs within the stated time frame.
b. Tests are to be completed consecutively.
c. There is no drill variant for the Smoke Generator. Under no circumstances
are live Smoke Generators to be used during the WHT.

Definition of Standards
6. The standards to be achieved in WHTs are as follows:
a. Pass — Pass in all tests.
b. Fail — Fail in any test.

5-54 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

7. Training Performance Standards. A CFAV is considered competent on


achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
CFAV is not competent in the use of the Smoke Generator. Retesting is to be carried
out after remedial training has been completed.

WHTs L1A1 SMOKE GENERATOR

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
1 Description of Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
Ammunition lowing question: 2. Standards:
Q. What colour is the Pass – Answer
body of the smoke gen- correct.
erator? Fail – Answer
A. Light green. incorrect.
2 Safety Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
lowing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. Why is it not permit- Pass – All
ted to use smoke gen- answers correct.
erators in confined Fail – One or
spaces or buildings? more answers
A. Because of the dan-
incorrect.
gers associated with the
inhalation of smoke.
Q. Why is it not permit-
ted to ignite the smoke
generator whilst it is
being held in the hand?
A. On ignition it will
become hot and will
burn the hand.

PROTECT 5-55
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

Test
Subject Stores Conditions Marking
No
3 Considerations Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
Prior to Siting lowing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. Having decided upon Pass – All
the area to be answers correct.
obscured, what consid- Fail – One or
erations should you more answers
make for:
incorrect.
a. Wind direction and
strength.
b. Field firing exercises.
A. Considerations
should be:
a. Site the generator
upwind of the area to be
obscured and assess
the strength of the pre-
vailing wind to deter-
mine the distance the
generator is placed from
the objective.
b. Personnel planning,
conducting or supervis-
ing field firing exercises
are to realise that the
use of smoke may
obscure their clear view
of participating cadets.
4 Ignition Nil Ask the CFAV the fol- 1. No time limit.
lowing questions: 2. Standards:
Q. After ignition, how Pass – All
long will it be before answers correct.
smoke emissions begin Fail – One or
to emit from the genera- more answers
tor?
incorrect.
A. 1 – 2 seconds.
Q. How long will the
smoke produced last?
A. Up to 5 minutes
depending upon the
strength and direction of
the prevailing wind.

5-56 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr10

Chapter 6

TRAINING SIMULATION
CONTENTS

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION 6-1

SECTION 2. PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 6-2

SECTION 3 COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING IN THE
DISMOUNTED CLOSE COMBAT TRAINER 6-6

SECTION 1. — INTRODUCTION

Purpose CONTENTS

PURPOSE 6-1
0601. This chapter details procedures and
rules when using various forms of training REFERENCING 6-1
simulation with Inf WS and Cadet WS.

Referencing

0602. Chapters 1 and 2 of this pamphlet are to be read and understood before
referencing this chapter.

0603. — 0607. Reserved.

PROTECT 6-1
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 2. — PLANNING OF LIVE FIRING MARKSMANSHIP


TRAINING ON THE DISMOUNTED CLOSE COMBAT TRAINER
Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 6-2
0608. The aim of Live Firing Marksmanship
DRESS 6-2
Training (LFMT) on the Dismounted Close
Combat Trainer (DCCT) is to teach and MEDICAL COVER 6-2
practice marksmanship training as laid down
RECONNAISSANCE 6-2
in the relevant cadet syllabus. The Training
Objectives (TO) to be achieved are also RANGE ACTION SAFETY PLAN (RASP) 6-3
contained within the relevant cadet syllabus
and are clearly defined, simple and QUALIFICATIONS 6-4

achievable. BRIEFINGS 6-4

0609. The planning of LFMT must be meticulous to ensure the activity is conducted
safely and in accordance with rules contained in the relevant cadet syllabus and the
relevant GSPs and the DCCT Range Standing Orders. The rules and guidelines
contained in this chapter are to be followed during the planning phase.

Dress

0610. The dress for LFMT is specified in the cadet manual and ensures that personnel
are able to meet the shooting standards wearing the appropriate dress and
equipment.

Medical Cover

0611. The Planning Officer/RCO is responsible for ensuring the provision of adequate
medical cover appropriate to the scale of the live firing activity. If this provision is not
available he is to refer the matter to the Senior Planning Officer (see Chapter 1).

Reconnaissance

0612. General. Reconnaissance is a vital part of the planning process. The RCO is to
reconnoitre the DCCT, to obtain access and establish the facilities that are
available/required. Some points to be considered are listed in the following
paragraphs.

0613. DCCT Orders. Planning must take into account the regulations set out for the
particular DCCT range. It is therefore essential that a copy of the orders are obtained
and read. The DCCT Range Orders must be read before planning LFMT and note
taken of the following:

6-2 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

a. Which weapons are available.

b. Firing times and any restrictions.

c. Access to the DCCT and vehicle parking.

d. Action in the event of an incident or accident.

e. Medical requirements.

Range Action and Safety Plan (RASP)

0614. It is mandatory for a RASP to be produced specific to each activity conducted


on the DCCT with Inf and cadet WS. It is to be produced by the Planning Officer/RCO
as a stand alone document or included as an annex to the Coordinating Instruction. In
the event that a Coordinating Instruction is not produced there will be a need to
include some of the administrative aspects within the document. The headings which
may be included and are not exhaustive in a RASP covering a LFMT activity fired on a
purpose built range are given at Annex A to chapter 4. The purpose of the RASP is to:
a. Show that the RCO has followed an acknowledged planning process, cov-
ering all aspects of safe training and as such it provides a clear audit trail.

b. Give an outline of the RCO’s personal responsibilities on the DCCT range,


before, during and after firing.

c. Detail the responsibilities of Safety Supervisors/coaches and other range


staff.

d. Describe the rehearsal procedures if required.

e. Detail the points/subjects that are to be covered during safety briefings to


all range staff and participating cadets/CFAV.

f. It is not mandatory for the RASP to be issued to Range Control/Host Unit

PROTECT 6-3
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

unless specified in Range Standing Orders.

Ser Appointment SA (07) Qualification Remarks


(a) (b) (c) (d)
1. RCO (SR) or (LR) (07) See Note 1
2. Safety Supervisor (SR), (LR) (07) or ARD See Note 1
3. DCCT Operator Basic Operator
4. Firer _ 1. See Note 1
2. The rules for civilians firing
weapons is at Section 5 of
Chapter 3.

Qualifications

0615. The following table specifies the minimum rank and qualification required by
personnel to conduct and participate in LFMT on the DCCT:

Notes:

The CFAV and cadets are to have passed the appropriate WHT in the last 6 months
for the rifle and LSW on the DCCT.

Briefings

0616. Comprehensive briefings will reduce the possibility of accidents. Briefings for
LFMT on DCCT ranges covered in this chapter should follow the format at Annex A to
Chapter 3.

0617. The RCO is to hold a briefing prior to the activity. All range staff involved are to
attend.

0618. All Staff. All staff must know the following:


a. The Training Objective(s) of the LFMT activity.

b. The general outline and sequence of events.

c. The signal to stop firing and the action to be taken in an emergency.

d. The actions to be taken on:

6-4 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

(1) The outbreak of fire.

(2) Observing a dangerous practice.


e. The actions on an incident or accident.

0619. Safety Supervisors. Safety Supervisors, who may also act as shooting
coaches, must know the following:
a. The handling drills, safety rules and firing characteristics of the weapons to
be supervised. Safety Supervisors are to have passed WHTs for those
weapons within 6 months in accordance with Chapter 6 of this publication.

b. The details of the practices to be fired and the way in which they are to be
controlled.

0920. Firers. The Senior Planning Officer is to ensure that all cadets participating in
the LFMT activity are formally trained and competent to take part in the activity and
have passed the relevant WHT within the previous six months of the activity taking
place.

0921. The RCO is to ensure that everyone is thoroughly briefed. A Safety Brief is to
include the following:
a. The signal to stop firing.

b. The action to be taken on receipt of the signal to stop firing.

c. The weapon is ONLY to be fired from the right shoulder.

d. Safe handling rules applicable to weapons in use.

e. Any limitations on movement.

f. Action on Casualties.

0922 – 0926. Reserved.

PROTECT 6-5
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

SECTION 3. — COMMON SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES FOR


TRAINING IN THE DISMOUNTED CLOSE COMBAT TRAINER

Introduction CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION 6-6
0927. The DCCT range is designed to
WORDS OF COMMAND 6-6
provide all-weather facility for day and night
firing. Although each DCCT range may have SAFETY SUPERVISION 6-6
specific rules contained within the DCCT
INSPECTIONS 6-7
Range Standing Orders, there are, however,
certain rules that are common to DCCT USE OF THE DCCT RANGE BY CADETS 6-7
ranges.
USE OF THE DCCT RANGE BY CIVILIANS 6-8

0928. Before taking over the DCCT range ACCIDENTS/INCIDENTS 6-9


the RCO is to complete MOD Form 906 –
Land Range Log. Each entry in the log identifies the user, records the number of
simulated rounds fired, provides a pre-firing and post-firing certificate to be signed by
the RCO and gives brief details of all accidents/incidents. The Land Range Log may
also be used to record routine inspections and maintenance work.

0929. The RCO is required to certify personally, by signature, that he holds the
correct qualification and that the DCCT Range Orders have been read and
understood and that they will be complied with in full. If, for any reason during
firing, the RCO has to leave the range he is to sign off in the MOD Form 906 and
the replacement RCO is to sign on the range by completing the relevant part of
the MOD Form 906 prior to the continuation of firing.

Words of Command

0930. Words of Command. The RCO is to ensure that all firers can hear his words of
command. The conditions of the practice to be fired dictate the orders to be given. A
guide to the sequence is at Chapter 4, Section 3 of this pamphlet.

Safety Supervision

0931. For all practices the ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers is to be sufficient to
ensure the safe conduct of the DCCT range. The ratio of Safety Supervisors to firers
are to be recorded in the RASP.

0932. On all DCCT ranges the muzzle is to be kept pointing horizontally at the
target/screen during all weapon handling drills and whenever made ready whilst on
the firing point.

6-6 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

Inspections

0933. Normal Safety Precautions. Personnel are NOT permitted to stand in front of
weapons during safety precautions no matter where they are being conducted.

0934. Before Firing. The RCO or Safety Supervisors/coaches are to conduct a


thorough physical check of all weapon chambers, magazines, ammunition pouches,
pockets and other personal clothing and equipment. This is to ensure that:
a. Weapons are clear.

b. No ammunition is present.

0935. During Firing. Details of readiness states of weapons, when firers are required
to move during practices, are given in the conditions of the LF lessons contained
within Service manuals. If, at the end of a practice, firers are required to leave the
firing point, then weapons are to be unloaded and inspected by the RCO or Safety
Supervisors before the order to leave the firing point is given by the RCO.The RCO
and Safety Supervisors are to ensure that during the conduct of any shooting in the
DCCT the weapon is ONLY fired from the right shoulder.

0936. After Firing. Before leaving the DCCT range, the RCO is to ensure that the
following are inspected by the RCO or Safety Supervisors/coaches:
a. All magazines.

b. All weapons.

c. The firers personal equipment and clothing (particular attention being paid
to pockets and pouches).

Use of The DCCT Range by Cadet Services

0937. The following additional rules apply for cadets using the DCCT Range:
a. Firing from the left shoulder is forbidden. The RCO and Safety Supervisors
are to ensure that during the conduct of any shooting in the DCCT the weapon
is ONLY fired from the right shoulder.

b. All practices are to be conducted in accordance with normal range proce-


dures.

c. Only qualified DCCT trained staff may move forward of the firing point.

PROTECT 6-7
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

d. Those cadets who have achieved a minimum of 1 Star grade or equivalent,


have passed the Weapon Handling Tests for the L85A2 rifle and are 12 years
or older.

e. Shooting practices in accordance with cadet training publications.

f. All firing is to be from the prone position.

g. Rifle shooting will be with iron sights and single shots only.

h. LSW fitted with SUSAT may be fired, but only by senior cadets of a mini-
mum of 2 Star level or equivalent and have been instructed on and passed the
Weapon Handling Tests for the LSW.

i. If cadets are to fire at human representative targets, parental agreement


must be obtained by the Cadet Unit prior to the activity taking place.

Use of The DCCT Range by Civilians

0938. In addition to the rules contained in Paragraph 0937 the following additional
rules apply for civilians using the DCCT Range:
a. They must be under the supervision of a member of the cadet forces who
is on duty and competent to provide such supervision.

b. The activity for which they have been given possession is a formally
endorsed activity supervised and conducted by the Military, which has been
expressly authorised in writing by the Commanding Officer. The authorisation
must specify the following:

(1) The purpose of the activity.

(2) The resources required to conduct the activity.

(3) Personnel allocated to the activity and their specific responsibilities.

(4) The time and location of the activity.

(5) The reason why the civilian is required to fire a service weapon.

0939. The following rules and procedures are to be enforced by the RCO:
a. The ratio of qualified safety supervisors to firers is to be 1:1.

b. The minimum age for civilians is 14 years of age.

6-8 PROTECT
PROTECT Amdt 1/Apr/10

c. Firing is only permitted from the prone position.

d. Automatic fire is prohibited.

e. All handling drills, including any stoppage drills, are to be completed by the
safety supervisor. The ‘Ready’ weapon is to be handed to the firer, who is only
to place the safety catch to ‘Fire’ and operate the trigger.

f. On completion of firing, the firer is to apply the safety catch to the ‘Safe’
position and the safety supervisor is to take control of the weapon.

g. The safety supervisor is to ensure that, at all times, the weapon is pointing
towards the screen.

h. Ensure the Safety Supervisor briefs the firer how and where to aim the
weapon.

i. Ensure that the firer is strong enough to handle and fire the weapon.

j. The RCO and Safety Supervisors are to ensure that during the con-
duct of the shoot the weapon is only fired from the right shoulder.

Accidents/Incidents

0940. In the event of an accident/incident with an Infantry and Cadet Weapon


Systems on the DCCT Range, the reporting procedure must comply with Section 6,
Chapter 1 of this publication.

0941-0945 Reserved

PROTECT 6-9
Amdt 1/Apr/10 PROTECT

6-10 PROTECT
PROTECT

PROTECT
PROTECT

PROTECT